diff options
author | Karl Berry <karl@freefriends.org> | 2005-12-29 00:34:36 +0000 |
---|---|---|
committer | Karl Berry <karl@freefriends.org> | 2005-12-29 00:34:36 +0000 |
commit | 41ceff5a615ab4e3d46b1c94bd26d9dcf9d6c1f8 (patch) | |
tree | c710ef0b82f65ae0f818e6ea8f10c2f40f2decf3 /Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html | |
parent | 2293d6885b754133151c14be7e01ad81baf0afbf (diff) |
doc/english/i-l
git-svn-id: svn://tug.org/texlive/trunk@21 c570f23f-e606-0410-a88d-b1316a301751
Diffstat (limited to 'Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html')
246 files changed, 9140 insertions, 0 deletions
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/LaTeX-info.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/LaTeX-info.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..c6167c134fd --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/LaTeX-info.html @@ -0,0 +1,47 @@ +<html> +<head><title>About Help On LaTeX</title> +</head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> + +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">About Help on LaTeX</font></h1> + +<p>These files originated from Help on LaTeX, Version 1.01, 9 Feb 94, +which can be accessed from the +<a href="externals.html">"Other on-line LaTeX Information" Page</a>. +That, in turn, was derived by Norm Walsh from a VMS help file provided +by George Greenwade. </p> + +<p>The current files are a revised and extended version created by +<a href="http://www.giss.nasa.gov/staff/sgreen/">Sheldon Green</a>. +He added much information, especially about those parts of LaTeX +he used most, equations and mathematical symbols. Whether or not +commands are +<a href="fragile.html">fragile</a> has been added in most cases. +Illustrative examples of usage have been added in several instances. +The hypertext linking has been greatly improved. +Each file contains a revision date.</p> + +<p>Much of the new information has been taken from Lamport, "A Document +Preparation System:Latex," and from comp.text.tex newsgroup postings. </p> + +<p>Since the death of Dr. Green in December 1995, no substantial +changes have been to these files. Relatively minor changes have +been made affecting page formatting (HTML) of the files or +as the result of verifying the external links.</p> + +<p>This set of files is also available as a +<a href="ltx-tar.html">Unix compressed tar file</a> +which can be installed locally to provide faster access.</p> + +<hr> +Return to the <a href="index.html">Introduction</a>.<br> +Go to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>.<br> + +<hr> + +<address> +Page revised: 1997:01:14, RBS +</address> + +</body> +</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/baselineskip.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/baselineskip.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..332a6425b99 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/baselineskip.html @@ -0,0 +1,31 @@ +<html> +<head><title>Help On LaTeX \baselineskip and \baselinestretch</title> +</head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\baselineskip \baselinestretch</font></h1> +<tt>\baselineskip</tt> is a <a href="ltx-86.html#lencmd">length command</a> +which specifies the minimum space between the botton of two successive +lines in a paragraph. +Its value may be automatically reset by LaTeX, for example, by font changes +in the text. +The value used for an entire paragraph is the value +in effect at the blank line or command which ends the paragraph unit. +<p> +<tt>\baselinestretch</tt> scales the value of <tt>\baselineskip</tt>. Its +default value is 1.0 but it may be reset with a +<a href="ltx-18.html"><tt>\renewcommand</tt></a> command. If one wants +to change the spacing in a document one should reset <tt>\baselinestretch</tt> +and <strong>not</strong> <tt>\baselineskip</tt> as the latter may be reset +automatically by LaTeX to account for local variations in the text, but it +is always scaled by the former. In principle, "double spacing" can be obtained +by <tt>\renewcommand{\baselinestretch}{2}</tt>. + +<hr> +See also: <A href="ltx-86.html">Lengths</A><br> +Return to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 23 Jun 1995. +</address> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/boldmath.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/boldmath.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..368f30f40eb --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/boldmath.html @@ -0,0 +1,42 @@ +<html> +<head><title>Help On LaTeX \boldmath</title></head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\boldmath</font></h1> +The <tt>\boldmath</tt> <a href="declarations.html">declaration</a> switches +to a bold math italic font; this causes letters, numbers, and +<strong>most</strong> symbols used in math mode to be set in a bold type. +<p> +(In <a href="versions.html">LaTeX2e</a> <strong>everything</strong> in the +formula is set in a bold font.) +<p> +The <tt>\unboldmath</tt> <a href="declarations.html">declaration</a> switches +back to the normal math italic font. +<p> +Note, these commands should <strong>not</strong> be used in math mode. +Thus the scope of the <a href="declarations.html">declaration</a> must +include the math mode expressions to which you want it to apply. +<p> +If you +want only part of a formula to be bold an +<a href="ltx-265.html"><tt>\mbox</tt></a> command is useful: +<pre> + <tt><a href="ltx-115.html#math">\(</a> Regular formula + + \mbox{\boldmath$ Bold part$} = 0 <a href="ltx-115.html#math">\)</a></tt> +</pre> +<p> +Both <tt>\boldmath</tt> and <tt>\unboldmath</tt> commands are +<a href="fragile.html">fragile</a>. +<hr> +Related topics +<ul> +<li><a href="ltx-115.html">Math Formulas</a> +<li><a href="mathfonts.html">Math fonts and styles</a> +<li><a href="ltx-176.html">Typefaces</a> and <a href="ltx-177.html">Styles</a> +</ul> +Return to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 7 Jul 1995. +</address> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/caption.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/caption.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..357cdf7892a --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/caption.html @@ -0,0 +1,19 @@ +<html> +<head><title>Help On LaTeX caption</title></head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\caption</font></h1> +<tt>\caption[lst-entry]{Text of table caption}</tt> is used to +generate a caption for a figure or a table. +<p> +the optional <tt>lst-entry</tt> may be used to generate an +entry for a list of figures or tables. +<hr> +See also <a href="ltx-43.html">picture environment</a><br> +See also <a href="ltx-67.html">table environment</a><br> +Go to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 2 May 1995. +</address> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/declarations.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/declarations.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..06631b5f7a1 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/declarations.html @@ -0,0 +1,51 @@ +<html> +<head><title>Help On LaTeX Declarations</title></head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">Declarations</font></h1> +A declaration is a LaTeX command that does not act on an argument, +but which changes the way LaTeX prints the following text or which changes +the value or meaning of some <a href="ltx-17.html">command</a> or +<a href="ltx-3.html">counter</a>. + +<h2>Scope</h2> +The <em>scope</em> of a declaration begins with the declaration +command itself and is ended by the first right +brace (<tt>}</tt>) or <tt>\end{}</tt> command whose matching +left brace (<tt>{</tt>) or <tt>\begin{}</tt> precedes the declaration. +However, the <tt>\begin{}</tt> and <tt>\end{}</tt> of environments +you create yourself, for example, with the +<a href="ltx-19.html"><tt>\newenvironment</tt></a> command, do not +count for calculating the scope of declarations. +<p> +The declaration is in effect within its scope, exept that it may be +countermanded by another declaration whose scope is a subset. +<p> +However, some declarations are <em>global</em>; they are in effect until +countermanded by another declaration. They include +<ul> +<li><a href="ltx-195.html"><tt>\addtocounter</tt></a> +<li><a href="ltx-271.html"><tt>\newcounter</tt></a> +<li><a href="ltx-310.html"><tt>\setcounter</tt></a> +<li><a href="ltx-137.html"><tt>\pagenumbering</tt></a> +<li><a href="ltx-140.html"><tt>\thispagestyle</tt></a> +<li><a href="ltx-87.html"><tt>\newlength</tt></a> +<li><a href="ltx-277.html"><tt>\newsavebox</tt></a> +<li><a href="ltx-20.html"><tt>\newtheorem</tt></a> +</ul> +<p> +Every declaration has an <a href="ltx-27.html">environment</a> of the +same name. If <tt>\decl</tt> is a declaration command, then +<pre> <tt>{\decl .... }</tt></pre> +can also be effected by +<pre> <tt>\begin{decl} .... \end{decl}</tt></pre> +If the declaration takes arguments these become additional arguments of the +<tt>\begin</tt> command. +<hr> +See also <a href="ltx-27.html">Environments</a><br> +Return to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 16 Nov 1995. +</address> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ellipses.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ellipses.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..b2110d115cf --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ellipses.html @@ -0,0 +1,23 @@ +<html> +<head><title>Help On LaTeX Ellipses</title></head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">Ellipses</font></h1> +Ellipses (three dots) can be produced by the following commands +<ul> +<li><A href="ltx-256.html"><tt>\ldots</tt></A> horizontally at bottom of line +<li><a href="ltx-207.html"><tt>\cdots</tt></a> horizontally center of line + (math mode only) +<li><A href="ltx-218.html"><tt>\ddots</tt></A> diagonal (math mode only) +<li><A href="ltx-340.html"><tt>\vdots</tt></A> vertical (math mode only) +</ul> + +<hr> +See also <A href="ltx-115.html">Math Formulas</A>, +<A href="ltx-119.html">Math Miscellany</A>.<br> +Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 25 April 1995. +</address> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/emph.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/emph.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..66153686893 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/emph.html @@ -0,0 +1,24 @@ +<html> +<head><title>Help On LaTeX \emph</title></head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\emph</font></h1> +This is LaTeX2e. +<p> +The <tt>\emph</tt> command is considered more +suitable for short stretches of emphasized text. +Like the LaTeX 2.09 <a href="ltx-221.html"><tt>\em</tt></a> command +it toggles between italics and Roman typefaces. +A typical use would be +<pre> + <tt>This is \emph{emphasized text}.</tt> +</pre> +<hr> +See also <a href="ltx-176.html">Typefaces</a>, + <a href="ltx-178.html">Sizes</a><br> +Return to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> +<address> +<hr> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 11 May 1995. +</address> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ensuremath.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ensuremath.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..10f0dea1611 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ensuremath.html @@ -0,0 +1,23 @@ +<html> +<head><title>Help On LaTeX2e \ensuremath</title></head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\ensuremath (<strong>LaTeX2e</strong>)</font></h1> +<tt>\ensuremath{Text set in math mode}</tt> +<p> +The argument of the <tt>\ensuremath</tt> command is always set in +math mode, regardless of the current mode. Note that math mode +is <strong>not</strong> specifically invoked in the argument of +the <tt>\ensuremath</tt> command. +<p> +Thus <tt>\ensuremath{$\alpha^2+\beta^2$}</tt> is <strong>not +correct</strong>.<br> +The <strong>correct</strong> form is <tt>\ensuremath{\alpha^2+\beta^2}</tt>. +<p> +See also <a href="ltx-18.html"><tt>\newcommand</tt></a> +<hr> +Go to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a><br> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 4 May 1995. +</address> +</body></html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/externals.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/externals.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..d1cbde94b8a --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/externals.html @@ -0,0 +1,189 @@ +<html> +<head><title>Other On-line LaTeX Information</title> +</head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> + +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">Other on-line LaTeX information</font></h1> + +<hr> + +<h2>Prime Sources</h2> +<dl> + <dt><b><big><a href="http://www.tug.org/">TeX Users Group Home + Page</a></big></b> + <!-- link verified 1998-05-21 --> + + <dt><b><big>The Comprehensive Tex Archive Network (CTAN)</big></b> + <dd>Virtually all TeX, LaTeX, and related software and documentation can + be obtained from CTAN, which has multiple ftp mirror sites. + See for example these + <a href="http://ctan.tug.org/ctan/">US</a> and + <!-- link verified 1998-05-14 --> + <a href="http://www.tex.ac.uk/">UK</a> sites. + <!-- link verified 1998-05-14 --> + + <dt><b><big><a href="http://www.tex.ac.uk/ctan/latex/">LaTeX + home page</a></big></b> + <dd>Doesn't seem to have been updated since 1994. + <!-- link verified 1998-05-21 --> + +</dl> + +<hr> + +<H2>Packages for Publications</H2> +<dl> + <dt><b><big>REVTeX</big></b> + <dd>The <a href="http://www.aip.org/">American Institute of Physics</a> + accepts manuscripts for several of its journals in + <a href="http://www.aip.org/aip/pubserv.html">REVTeX</a>. + <!-- link verified 1998-05-14 --> + + <dt><b><big>AASTeX</big></b> + <dd>Similarly, the <a href="http://aas.org/">American Astronomical Society</a> + accepts manuscripts for several of its journals in + <a href="http://www.aas.org/publications/aastex/">AASTeX</a>. + <!-- link verified 1998-05-14 --> + + The <a href="ftp://aas.org/pubs/aastex-misc/FAQ">AASTeX FAQ</a> + might be helpful. + <!-- link verified 1998-05-14 --> + + Astronomers will also find + <a href="http://www.stsci.edu/software/TeX.html">TeX and LaTeX Macros + for astronomers</a> from STScI to be useful; + Particularly good is Chris Biemesderfer's + <a href="http://www.stsci.edu/ftp/software/tex/ltxcrib/">LaTeX + Command Summary</a>. + <!-- link verified 1998-05-14 --> + + <dt><b><big>AMSTeX</big></b> + <dd>The <a href="http://www.ams.org/">American Mathematical Society</a> + has their own macro package, + <a href="http://www.ams.org/tex/home.html">AMSTeX</a>. + <!-- link verified 1998-05-14 --> + +</dl> + + + + + +<hr> + +<h2>More Resources and Links</h2> + + +<p>The UK TeX Users' Group's +<a href="http://www.cogs.susx.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?introduction=yes">FAQ +Page</a> is searchable and up-to-date.</p> + <!-- link verified 1998-05-14 --> + + +<p><a href="http://www.emerson.emory.edu/services/latex/latex2e/latex2e_toc.html">LaTeXe help 1.4</a> +is available from Emory Univ.</p> + <!-- link verified 1998-05-14 --> + + +<p><a href="http://www.cis.ohio-state.edu/~gurari/TeX4ht/mn.html">TeX4ht: +TeX and LaTeX for Hypertext</a> +is available from Ohio State.</p> + <!-- link verified 1998-05-14 --> + + +<p><a href="http://www.am.qub.ac.uk/latex/latex_1.html">Hypertext information +similar to the current set of files</a> also originated from VMS +help files.</p> + +<p><a href="http://stkwww.fys.ruu.nl:8000/posters/hogeveen/recommend/astdoc.html">Aspects of publishing with TeX and LaTeX</a> +is an introduction to the philosophy of TeX and LaTeX.</p> + <!-- link verified 1998-05-21 --> + +<p><a href="http://club.eng.cam.ac.uk/help/tpl/textprocessing/LaTeX_intro.html">Text Processing Using LaTeX</a> +from Cambridge Univ. Engineering Dept. includes excellent beginning +and advanced hypertext manuals as well as information in other formats.</p> + <!-- link verified 1998-05-21 --> + +<p>Macintosh users will want to take a look at Gary Gray's +<a href="http://www.esm.psu.edu/mac-tex/">TeX/LaTeX Software for the +Macintosh</a>, with pointers to many tools for dealing with LaTeX +and what's new listings.</p> + <!-- link verified 1998-05-21 --> + +<p>For those with less experience with LaTeX, good introductory material +includes:</p> + +<ul> + <li><A href="http://riceinfo.rice.edu/Computer/Documents/Classes/Unix/class/class.html"> + Intro to LaTeX</a>, + a short course at Rice University. + <!-- link verified 1998-05-21 --> + + <li><a href="http://www.maths.tcd.ie/~dwilkins/LaTeXPrimer/Index.html">Getting + Started with LaTeX</a> by David Wilkins, Trinity College, Dublin. + <!-- link verified 1998-05-21 --> + + <li><a href="http://zen.efs.mq.edu.au/doc/LatexTutorial/LatexTutorial.html">LaTeX Tutorial</a> from Macquarie University. + <!-- link verified 1998-05-21 --> + + <li><a href="http://www.cs.stir.ac.uk/guides/latex/guide.html">Document + Preparation with LaTeX</a> from the Univ. of Sterling, UK. + <!-- link verified 1998-05-21 --> + +</ul> + + + + + + +<p>The <a href="http://www.loria.fr/services/tex/">(La)TeX navigator</a> +from LORIA in France is an excellent source of documentation and pointers +to other resources. The site is also in available in +<a href="http://www.loria.fr/services/tex/english/index.html">English</a> and +<a href="http://www.loria.fr/services/tex/german/index.html">Deutsch</a>.</p> + <!-- link verified 1998-05-21 --> + +<p>Lots of +<a href="http://www.cs.csubak.edu/Doc/Tex/welcome.html">documentation</a>, +mostly PostScript, is available from King Lee at Cal State-Bakersfield.</p> + <!-- link verified 1998-05-21 --> + +<p><a href="http://www.stat.ucla.edu/develop/tex/index.html">TeX +and Friends</a>, from UCLA, is mostly (compressed) PostScript files.</p> + <!-- link verified 1998-05-21 --> + +<p><a href="http://www.cl.cam.ac.uk/TeXdoc/TeXdocs.html">Tex-related +documents</a> from Cambridge Univ.; includes TeX Users Group newsletter +and many documents (mostly in dvi format).</p> + <!-- link verified 1998-05-21 --> + + + + +<p>The Usenet newsgroup +<b><a href="news:comp.text.tex">comp.text.tex</a></b> can be a good +source of information and help (but read the FAQ before posting).</p> + +<p>Of course, there's always +<a href="http://www.yahoo.com/Computers_and_Internet/Desktop_Publishing/TeX/">Yahoo</a>.</p> + <!-- link verified 1998-05-14 --> + + + + + + +<hr> + +Go back to the <a href="index.html">Introduction</a><br> +Go to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a><br> + +<hr> + +<address> +Links verified: RBS, 1998-05-14, 05-21<br> +</address> + +</body> +</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/fonts2e.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/fonts2e.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..1bc6a6108cf --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/fonts2e.html @@ -0,0 +1,51 @@ +<html> +<head><title>Help On LaTeX2e Font Selection</title></head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">Font Selection (LaTeX2e)</font></h1> +The following methods for font selection may +<strong>not</strong> be used in math mode. +<p> +Type styles are specified by three <em>independent</em> components. If +a font (the combination of these three components) is chosen which is +not available, LaTeX will issue a warning and substitute a similar font. +<p> +<ul> +<li>series +<li>family +<li>shape +</ul> +These may be chosen by either a command so that the choice applies +to the text within the command argument, or by a +<a href="declarations.html">declaration</a> which obeys the usual +rules for scope. The two forms are +<pre> + <strong>declaration</strong> <strong>command</strong> + + \mdseries \textmd Medium Series + \bfseries \textbf Boldface Series + + \rmfamily \textrm Roman Family + \sffamily \textsf Sans Serif Family + \ttfamily \texttt Typewrite Family + + \upshape \textup Upright Shape + \itshape \textit Italic Shape + \slshape \textsl Slanted Shape + \scshape \textsc Small Caps Shape + \normalfont \textnormal Normal Style +</pre> +The <tt>\normalfont</tt> declaration sets series, family, and shape to +the main text font of the document. +<p> +When using the Typewriter Family, words will be hyphenated only where +permitted by a <tt><a href="ltx-182.html">\-</a></tt> command. +<hr> +See also Typeface <a href="ltx-178.html">Sizes</a><br> +See also <a href="mathfonts.html">Math fonts and styles</a><br> +Return to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 19 May 1995. +</address> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/fragile.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/fragile.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..5252c66ffa7 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/fragile.html @@ -0,0 +1,59 @@ +<html> +<head><title>Help On LaTeX fragile commands</title></head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">Fragile and Robust commands</font></h1> +LaTeX commands are either <em>robust</em> or <em>fragile</em>. Fragile +commands need special care <em>if they are part of a moving argument</em>. +<p> +Arguments to some LaTeX commands are called <em>moving arguments</em> because +they may be "moved" to other places in the document. For example, the argument +of <a href="ltx-141.html">Sectioning comands</a> may be moved +to the <a href="ltx-170.html">Table of Contents</a>. Other examples +of moving arguments include: +<ul> +<li>arguments of <a href="caption.html"><tt>\caption</tt></a> commands +<li>terminal input and output, <a href="ltx-174.html"><tt>\typeout</tt></a> + and <a href="ltx-175.html"><tt>\typein</tt></a> +<li>commands that <a href="ltx-264.html">produce page headings</a> +<li>the <a href="ltx-91.html">Letter Environment</a> +<li>the <a href="ltx-324.html"><tt>\thanks</tt></a> command +<li> an <tt>@</tt> expression in the <a href="ltx-202.html">Array</a> or + <a href="ltx-68.html">Tabular</a> environment +</ul> +A fragile command that appears in a moving argument must be preceded by a +<tt>\protect</tt> command. The <tt>\protect</tt> applies only to the +immediately following command; if arguments of this command also contain +fragile commands, the latter must be protected with their own <tt>\protect</tt>. + +<h2>Some fragile commands</h2> +The following list is not exhaustive, but illustrates the kind of commands +which are fragile +<ul> +<li>All commands that have an optional argument are fragile. +<li>Environments delimited by <tt>\begin ... \end</tt> are fragile. +<li><a href="ltx-421.html">Display math</a> environment delimited by + <tt>\[ ... \]</tt> +<li><a href="ltx-115.html">Math environment</a> <tt>\( ... \)</tt> + <ul><li>However, <tt>$ ... $</tt> is robust</ul> +<li>Line breaks, <a href="ltx-181.html"><tt>\\</tt></a> +<li><a href="item.html"><tt>\item</tt></a> commands +<li><a href="ltx-231.html"><tt>\footnote</tt></a> commands +</ul> + +<h2>Some robust commands</h2> +In general, commands which change <a href="ltx-176.html">Type face or +Type style</a> are robust. +<p> +<a href="ltx-86.html">Length commands</a> are robust and should +<strong>not</strong> be preceded by a <tt>\protect</tt> command. Nor +should a <tt>\protect</tt> command be used in the argument to +<a href="ltx-195.html"><tt>\addtocounter</tt></a> or +<a href="ltx-310.html"><tt>\setcounter</tt></a> command. +<hr> +Return to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 29 Sep 1995. +</address> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/frenchsp.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/frenchsp.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..222bd8b8452 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/frenchsp.html @@ -0,0 +1,16 @@ +<html> +<head><title>Help On LaTeX \frenchspacing</title></head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\frenchspacing</font></h1> +The <tt>\frenchspacing</tt> <a href="declarations.html">declaration</a> +tells LaTeX <strong>not</strong> to insert extra space at the end of +sentences. This style is common in non-English languages. +<hr> +See also <a href="ltx-143.html">Spaces and Boxes</a><br> +Return to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 5 Jun 1995. +</address> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/index.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/index.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..cf271375d3d --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/index.html @@ -0,0 +1,98 @@ +<html> +<head> +<title>Hypertext Help with LaTeX</title> +</head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" +text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> + +<h1><font color="#cc0000">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font></h1> + +<p>LaTeX is a word processing (or, more accurately, a typesetting) +program. It typesets a file of text using the TeX program and +the LaTeX Macro package for TeX. It does this by processing an +input file containing the text of a document with interspersed +commands that describe how the text should be formatted.</p> + +<p>Unike many word processing programs, which concentrate on formatting +material on the page (often called WYSIWYG, for "what you see is what +you get"), LaTeX concentrates on "content." +LaTeX is a Generalized Mark-up Language macro package for the TeX +typesetting program. That is, one specifies +the structure: sections, title, appendix, authors' names, etc., +which bear little relation to how this will look on a page. +That is determined by the +<a href="ltx-22.html">document style</a> +files (*.sty); +standard ones are provided for such things as articles, reports, +books, and letters. However, these style files may be readily replaced +by others, giving a completely different look. +Of course, it is possible in LaTeX to specify much about +the physical layout, but this tends +to be done with commands that define things like space between lines or +amount to indent paragraphs rather than by positioning each piece of text +on the page as is typical in WYSIWYG systems.</p> + +<p>LaTeX produces +as output a Device Independent (*.dvi) file that contains +commands that can be translated into commands for a variety of output +devices. It also produces a transcript or log (*.log) file +that contains summary +information and diagnostic messages for any errors discovered in the +input file and an auxiliary (*.aux) file which contains cross +refererence information for Tables, citations, etc. It is sometimes +necessary to run LaTeX twice so that it has correct cross reference +information, especially when modifications have changed the numbering.</p> + +<p>These hypertext help files are meant to provide reference information +for those with some familiarity with LaTeX. They are not an introduction +or tutorial.</p> + + +<dl> + <dt><big><b><a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a></b></big> + <dd>Links to help by subject, LaTeX command, or environment + <p></p> + + <dt><big><b><a href="versions.html">Notes on Versions</a></b></big> + <dd>LaTeX 2.09 and LaTeX2e + <p></p> + + <dt><big><b><a href="refs.html">Reference Books</a></b></big> + <p></p> + + <dt><big><b><a href="LaTeX-info.html">About these files</a></b></big> + <dd>Plus info on how to obtain them via ftp + <p></p> + + <dt><big><b><a href="externals.html">LaTeX resources on the Web</a></b></big> + <dd>Including REVTeX, AMSTeX, and AASTeX + <p></p> + + <dt><big><b><a href="mirror.html">Mirrors of this site</a></b></big> + <dd>Copies of these files which might provide faster access + <p></p> + +</ul> + + +<p> </p> + + +<p>These pages were originally created by +<a href="http://www.giss.nasa.gov/staff/sgreen/">Sheldon Green</a>, +who passed away in December 1995. +Updates subsequent to Dr. Green's death have been made only for +purposes of page formatting and link verification. +Please contact +<a href="mailto:webmaster@giss.nasa.gov">webmaster@giss.nasa.gov</a> +if you are interested in assisting with maintenance and updates to +these pages.</p> + +<hr> + +<address> +Updated: 1998-12-03, RBS +</address> + +</body> +</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/input.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/input.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..4246ee64946 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/input.html @@ -0,0 +1,95 @@ +<html> +<head> +<title>Input to LaTeX</title> +</head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> + +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">Input to LaTeX</font></h1> +Input to LaTeX is plain text (ascii) which includes both the text of the +document and also formatting commands. It is possible to +<a href="ltx-165.html">split the input</a> into several files using: +<ul> +<li><a href="ltx-245.html"><tt>\include</tt></a> +<li><a href="ltx-248.html"><tt>\input</tt></a> +</ul> +<p> +Space characters separate words. Two space characters in a row are +equivalent to a single space character. The end of line is also +equivalent to a space character. (However, a percent sign, +<a href="ltx-434.html"><tt>%</tt></a>, can end a line without +generating a space character.) Generally, space characters at the beginning +of a line are ignored. +<p> +An empty or blank line between two lines of text defines +<a href="ltx-111.html">a new paragraph</a>. +Two blank lines are equivalent to one. +<h2>Special Characters</h2> +The following ten characters are <a href="ltx-164.html">Special LaTeX +Characters</a>: +<pre><tt> $ & % # _ { } ~ ^ \ </tt> +</pre> +If entered directly in the input they cause LaTeX to do something special. +You can get the following seven of them into your document by simply +preceding them with a backslash (<tt>\</tt>): +<pre><tt> $ & % # _ { } </tt> +</pre> +To get the other three (<tt> ~ ^ \ </tt>) in +your output requires <a href="ltx-164.html">more work</a>. + +<h2>LaTex Commands</h2> +Commands take one of two forms +<ul><li>a backslash (<tt>\</tt>) followed by a single special character + <li>a bacslash (<tt>\</tt>) followed by a string of letters +</ul> +The second case is case-sensitive; +<a href="ltx-405.html"><tt>\Gamma</tt></a> is different from +<a href="ltx-405.html"><tt>\gamma</tt></a>. +These commands are terminated by a nonletter, i.e., a blank, a number, +a punctuation mark or special character. +<p> +Commands may have mandatory arguments, which are input in braces +(<tt>{}</tt>). +They may also have optional arguments, which are input in square brackets +(<tt>[]</tt>). +<p> +For commands which produce text a trailing blank may be interpreted as the +end of the command, which does not automatically create a space, so + you may have to do something to create an +<a href="ltx-431.html">interword space</a> after this text. + +<h2><a name="structure">Structure of Input</a></h2> +LaTeX input normally begins with a +<a href="ltx-22.html"><tt>\documentstyle</tt></a> command. (In LaTeX2e +this is replaced with a <a href="versions.html"><tt>\documentclass</tt></a> +command.) +<p> +The beginning of the document text follows a <tt>\begin{document}</tt> +command. +<p> +Input between the <tt>\documentstyle</tt> and <tt>\begin{document}</tt> +is called the <em>preamble</em> and typically contains <a href="ltx-17.html">new +command definitions</a>, information for the +<a href="ltx-263.html">title</a>, <a href="declarations.html">declarations</a> +which affect things like <a href="ltx-176.html">Typefaces</a>, etc. +<p> +The document text (and generally also the LaTeX input) is terminated by a +<tt>\end{document}</tt> command. +<p> +It is possible to obtain some of the input from <a href="ltx-165.html">external +files</a>, i.e., those which are not the main file input to the LaTeX program. +<hr> +See also +<ul> +<li><a href="ltx-165.html">Splitting the input</a> +<li><a href="ltx-164.html">Special Characters</a> +<li><a href="ltx-99.html">Line and Page Breaking</a> +<li><a href="ltx-111.html">Making Paragraphs</a> +<li><a href="ltx-143.html">Spaces and Boxes</a> +</ul> +Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 30 Oct 1995. +</address> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/item.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/item.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..634cf6ae42f --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/item.html @@ -0,0 +1,30 @@ +<html> +<head><title>Help On LaTeX \item</title> +</head><body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\item</font></h1> +<tt>\item[label] Text for this item</tt> +<p> +The <tt>\item</tt> command starts a new item in a +<a href="lists.html">List Environment</a>. The optional argument +<tt>label</tt> generates the item label; if not given a default +label is used. +<p> +A blank line preceding an <tt>\item</tt> command has no effect. +<p> +In order to use brackets as part of the <tt>label</tt> (for example, +in the <a href="ltx-31.html">Description Environment</a>) they must +be enclosed in braces: +<pre> + <tt>\item[{[}item 1{]}] This is the first item</tt> +</pre> +The <tt>\item</tt> command is <a href="fragile.html">fragile</a>. +<hr> +See also <a href="ltx-27.html">Environments</a>, + <a href="lists.html">Lists</a><br> +Go to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 29 Jun 1995. +</address> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/lefteqn.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/lefteqn.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..3e0af56d138 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/lefteqn.html @@ -0,0 +1,41 @@ +<html> +<head><title>Help On LaTeX \lefteqn</title></head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\lefteqn</font></h1> +<p> +<p><pre> + <tt>\lefteqn{eqn}</tt> +</pre> + prints <tt>eqn</tt> in display math style, but pretends that it has + zero width. It is typicaly used within an + <a href="ltx-223.html"><tt>Eqnarray</tt></a> environment for + displaying long equations that require multiple lines. +<p> +A typical use might be +<pre> + <tt>\begin{eqnarray} + \lefteqn{\int_0^<a href="ltx-407.html">\infty</a> some expression =} \\ + & & some terms <a href="ltx-181.html">\\</a> + & & <a href="ltx-265.html">\mbox{}</a> + more terms + \end{eqnarray}</tt> +</pre> +Note that the empty <a href="ltx-265.html"><tt>\mbox{}</tt></a> is so LaTeX +knows that the following <tt>+</tt> is a binary operator, and is not +attached to the first of the "more terms" as a unary operator. +<hr> +Related topics +<ul> +<li><A href="ltx-27.html">Environments</A> +<li><a href="ltx-202.html">Array Environment</a> +<li><a href="ltx-223.html">Eqnarray Environment</a> +<li><a href="ltx-224.html">Equation Environment</a> +<li><a href="ltx-421.html">Displaymath Environment</a> +<li><a href="ltx-115.html">Math Formulas</a> +</ul> +Return to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 29 Jun 1995. +</address> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/lists.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/lists.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..4912c395d99 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/lists.html @@ -0,0 +1,58 @@ +<html> +<head><title>Help On LaTeX Lists</title> +</head><body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">Lists</font></h1> +LaTeX provides several List-Making Environments +These may be nested up to four deep. +<p> + +<p>The items in the list are given by <a href="item.html"><tt>\item</tt></a> +commands. +A blank line before an <tt>\item</tt> command has no effect. + +<h2>List-Making Enviroments</h2> +<DL> +<dt><h3><a href="ltx-31.html">Description</a></h3> +<dd>Typically used for giving short definitions or descriptions; the +<tt>label</tt> argument of the <a href="item.html"><tt>\item</tt></a> command +generally giving the term being described (although it <strong>can</strong> +be left blank, it will look strange). The text of the +<a href="item.html"><tt>\item</tt></a> command is indented. + +<dt><h3><a href="ltx-222.html">Enumerate</a></h3> +<dd>Typically used for numbered lists. +<a href="ltx-3.html">Counters</a> for these lists are +provided by <tt>enumi, emumii, enumiii, enumiv</tt>, respectively, for the four +levels of nesting. + +<dt><h3><a href="ltx-250.html">Itemize</a></h3> +<dd>Typically used for unnumbered lists. The default +<tt>label</tt> argument of the <a href="item.html"><tt>\item</tt></a> command +produces "tick-marks" which vary by level of nesting, generally +"bullets" for the first level. + +<dt><h3><a href="ltx-260.html">List</a></h3> +<dd>Produces a list of labeled items and has required arguments that +allow a great deal of flexibility in layout. It is generally used +to define new environments with the +<a href="ltx-19.html"><tt>\newenvironment</tt></a> command, or to +set up one-of-a-kind lists. + +<dt><h3><a href="trivlist.html">Trivlist</a></h3> +<dd>Like the List Environment, using the currently defined values of +list-making parameters; normally used to define an environment with a +single item, with an <a href="item.html"><tt>\item</tt></a> command +as part of the environment definition. + +</DL> +<hr> +See also <a href="item.html"><tt>\item</tt></a><br> +See also <a href="ltx-3.html">Counters</a>, +<a href="ltx-27.html">Environments</a><br> +Go to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 18 May 1995. +</address> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-111.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-111.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..56c6c8bb6be --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-111.html @@ -0,0 +1,25 @@ +<html> +<head><title>Help On LaTeX Making Paragraphs</title></head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">Making Paragraphs</font></h1> +<p> + A paragraph is ended by one or more completely blank lines -- lines + not containing even a <a href="ltx-434.html"><tt>%</tt></a> (comments). + A blank line should not appear where a new + paragraph cannot be started, such as in math mode or in the argument + of a sectioning command. + +<H2>Subtopics</H2> +<ul> +<li><A href="ltx-247.html">\indent</A> +<li><A href="ltx-280.html">\noindent</A> +<li><A href="ltx-293.html">\par</A> +</ul> +<hr> +Return to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 10 May 1995. +</address> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-115.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-115.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..539ef71c2a0 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-115.html @@ -0,0 +1,82 @@ +<html> +<head><title>Help On LaTeX Math Formulas</title></head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">Math Formulas</font></h1> +<p> + There are four environments that put LaTeX in math mode: +<ul><li><a href="#math">math</a> (see below) + <li><a href="ltx-421.html">displaymath</a> + <li><a href="ltx-223.html">eqnarray</a> + <li><a href="ltx-224.html">equation</a> +</ul> + All four of these environments are typeset in math + <a href="ltx-130.html">mode</a>, using a math italic font and LaTeX + ideas about spacing in math mode. (See also <a href="mathfonts.html">math + fonts and styles</a>.) +<p> + The math environment is for formulas that + appear right in the text. The displaymath, eqnarray, and equation + environments are for formulas that apppear on their own line(s). + The math environment can be used in both paragraph and LR mode, but + displaymath, eqnarray, and equation environments can be used only + in paragraph mode. + +<h2><a name="math">Math environment</a></h2> + The math environment may be specified, as with all environments, by +<pre> + <tt>\begin{math} math equation \end{math}</tt> +</pre> + However, it is used so often that it has two equivalent shorter forms: +<pre> + <tt>\( math equation \)</tt> +</pre> +or just +<pre> + <tt>$ math equation $</tt> +</pre> +In <a href="versions.html">LaTeX2e</a> one can also use +<pre> + <tt><a href="ensuremath.html">\ensuremath</a>{math equation}</tt> +</pre> +<p> +For example, +<a href="ltx-179.html">Subscripts</a> and +<a href="ltx-180.html">superscripts</a> can only be used in math +mode. To include these in running text one could use: +<pre> + <tt>The formula for water is H$_2$O. + If the hypotenuse is $c$, then $c^2=a^2+b^2$.</tt> +</pre> +Note that it is standard to use math mode for letters, such as the +the <tt>$c$</tt> above, which are math variables. +<hr> +<h2>Related topics</H2> +<ul> +<li><a href="ltx-421.html">Displaymath environment</a> +<li><a href="ltx-223.html">Eqnarray environment</a> +<li><a href="ltx-224.html">Equation environment</a> +<p> +<li><a href="ltx-130.html">LaTeX Modes</a> +<p> +<li><a href="mathfonts.html">Math fonts and styles</a> +<li><A href="ltx-179.html">Subscripts</A> and + <a href="ltx-180.html">Superscripts</a> +<li><A href="ltx-117.html">Math Symbols</A> +<li><A href="ltx-118.html">Spacing in Math Mode</A> +<li><A href="ltx-119.html">Math Miscellany</A> +<li><a href="ellipses.html">Ellipses</a> +<p> +<li><a href="boldmath.html"><tt>\boldmath</tt></a> for a bold math font +<li><a href="ltx-235.html"><tt>\frac</tt></a> for generating built-up fractions +<li><a href="stackrel.html"><tt>\stackrel</tt></a> for putting things above + each other +<li><a href="ltx-319.html"><tt>\sqrt</tt></a> for square (and nth) roots +</ul> +<p> +Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 31 May 1995. +</address> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-117.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-117.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..761ec951f03 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-117.html @@ -0,0 +1,45 @@ +<html> +<head><title>Help On LaTeX Math Symbols</title></head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">Math Symbols</font></h1> +<p> + TeX provides almost any mathematical symbol you're likely to need. +<p> + Some, like <tt>+ - = < > | </tt> are obtained from the keyboard (the + first three can be used in any mode; the last three only in math mode). +<p> + Others are generated by LaTeX commands and + can generally be used only in math mode. + The following describe some of the useful symbols +<ul> + <li><a href="ltx-401.html#math">Accents</a> + <li><a href="ltx-406.html">Arrows</a> (math mode) + <li><a href="ltx-404.html">Binary and relational operators</a> (math mode) + <li><a href="ltx-403.html">Delimiters</a> (parenthesis-like objects; math mode) + <li><a href="ltx-405.html">Greek letters</a> (math mode) + <li><a href="ltx-407.html">Miscellaneous symbols</a> + <li><a href="ltx-409.html">Math functions</a> (sin, cos, log, ... ; math mode) + <li><a href="ltx-408.html">Variable size math symbols</a> (sums, integrals, ... + ; math mode) +<p> + <li><a href="ltx-119.html">Math Miscellany</a> +<p> + <li><a href="ltx-235.html"><tt>\frac</tt></a> generates fractions (math mode) + <li><a href="ltx-319.html"><tt>\sqrt</tt></a> generates n-th root symbol + (math mode) + <li><a href="stackrel.html"><tt>\stackrel</tt></a> places one item above + another (math mode) +<p> + <li><a href="boldmath.html"><tt>\boldmath</tt></a> for a bold math font +</ul> + +<hr> +See also <a href="mathfonts.html">Math Fonts and Styles</a><br> +Go to <a href="ltx-115.html">Math Formulas</a><br> +Return to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 5 Jul 1995. +</address> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-118.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-118.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..bd64652c6ee --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-118.html @@ -0,0 +1,25 @@ +<html> +<head><title>Help On LaTeX Spacing in Math Mode</title></head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">Spacing in Math Mode</font></h1> +<p> + In a math environment, LaTeX ignores the spaces you type and puts in + the spacing that it thinks is best. LaTeX formats mathematics the way + it's done in mathematics texts. If you want different spacing, LaTeX + provides the following four commands for use in math mode: +<ul> +<li><a href="ltx-183.html"><tt>\;</tt></a> - a thick space +<li><a href="ltx-184.html"><tt>\:</tt></a> - a medium space +<li><a href="ltx-185.html"><tt>\,</tt></a> - a thin space +<li><a href="ltx-186.html"><tt>\!</tt></a> - a negative thin space +</ul> +<hr> +See also <a href="ltx-115.html">Math Formulas</a>, + <a href="ltx-117.html">Math Symbols</a><br> +Return to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a><br> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 7 Jul 1995. +</address> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-119.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-119.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..9e0fb80d330 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-119.html @@ -0,0 +1,39 @@ +<html> +<head><title>Help On LaTeX Math Miscellany</title></head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">Math Miscellany</font></h1> + +The math symbols <tt>< ></tt> and <tt>|</tt> are used only in math mode. +Note that left and right angle brackets (which are somewhat taller than +< and >) can be obtained with +<a href="ltx-403.html"><tt>\langle</tt> and <tt>\rangle</tt></a> commands. +<p> +The single right quotation mark, <tt>'</tt>, produces a prime in math mode. +You can also use <a href="ltx-407.html"><tt>\prime</tt></a>. + +<H2>Also see</H2> +<ul> +<li><a href="boldmath.html"><tt>\boldmath</tt></a> font +<li><A href="ltx-207.html"><tt>\cdots</tt></A> (centered ellipsis) +<li><A href="ltx-218.html"><tt>\ddots</tt></A> (diagonal ellipsis) +<li><A href="ltx-235.html"><tt>\frac</tt></A> +<li><A href="ltx-256.html"><tt>\ldots</tt></A> (ellipsis) +<li><A href="ltx-287.html"><tt>\overbrace</tt></A> +<li><A href="ltx-288.html"><tt>\overline</tt></A> +<li><A href="ltx-319.html"><tt>\sqrt</tt></A> +<li><a href="stackrel.html"><tt>\stackrel</tt></a> putting + things above other things +<li><A href="ltx-335.html"><tt>\underbrace</tt></A> +<li><A href="ltx-336.html"><tt>\underline</tt></A> +<li><A href="ltx-340.html"><tt>\vdots</tt></A> (vertical ellipsis) +</ul> +<hr> +See also <a href="ltx-115.html">Math Formulas</a>, + <a href="ltx-117.html">Math Symbols</a>, + <a href="mathfonts.html">Math Fonts and Styles</a><br> +Return to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 5 Jul 1995. +</address> +</body></html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-13.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-13.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..75e5148ba52 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-13.html @@ -0,0 +1,62 @@ +<html> +<head><title>Help On LaTeX Cross References</title></head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">Cross References</font></h1> +<p> + One reason for numbering things like figures and equations is to refer + the reader to them, as in "See Figure 3 for more details." + +<H2>Sections, Equations, Tables, etc.</H2> +One can generate numbered references to anything for which LaTeX +maintains a <a href="ltx-3.html">counter</a> by placing a +<a href="ltx-252.html"><tt>\label</tt></a> command +with some mnemonic name in the appropriate +<a href="ltx-27.html">environment</a>. The reference is then generated +by use of the <A href="ltx-303.html"><tt>\ref</tt></A> command with the +same mnemonic. +<p> +For example +<pre> + <tt>\begin{equation} + <A href="ltx-252.html">\label</a>{eqno1} + c <a href="ltx-404.html">\geq</a> <a href="ltx-319.html">\sqrt</a>{a^2+b^2+1} + \end{equation} + .... intervening text ... + From Eq.~(<A href="ltx-303.html">\ref</a>{eqno1}) we see ...</tt> +</pre> +Assuming that this is the first equation, +the last line will produce "From Eq. (1) we see ..." Note the +use of the <a href="ltx-143.html"><tt>~</tt></a> +to ensure that there is no line break between "Eq." and "(1)." +Also note that the <tt>\ref</tt> command produces only the number; +if you want the number to be in parentheses (as shown here) you have +to include them in your text. + +<h2>Bibliographic citations</h2> +Bibliographic citations work somewhat differently. The following +should be consulted: +<ul> +<li><a href="ltx-211.html"><tt>\cite</tt></a> +<li><a href="ltx-73.html"><tt>\thebibligraphy</tt></a> +</ul> +<hr> +See also +<ul> +<li><A href="ltx-252.html"><tt>\label</tt></A> +<li><A href="ltx-303.html"><tt>\ref</tt></A> +<li><A href="ltx-291.html"><tt>\pageref</tt></A> +<p> +<li><a href="ltx-211.html"><tt>\cite</tt></a> +<li><a href="ltx-73.html"><tt>\thebibligraphy</tt></a> +<p> +<li><a href="ltx-3.html">Counters</a> +<li><a href="ltx-27.html">Environments</a> +<li><a href="ltx-141.html">Sectioning</a> +</ul> +Return to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a><br> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 03 Nov 1995. +</address> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-130.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-130.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..d6a99f89d07 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-130.html @@ -0,0 +1,67 @@ +<html> +<head><title>Help On LaTeX Modes</title></head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">Modes</font></h1> +<p> + When LaTeX is processing your input text, it is always in one of three + modes: +<ul> + <li><I>Paragraph</I> mode + <li><I>Math</I> mode + <li><I>Left-to-right</I> mode, called LR mode for short +</ul> + + LaTeX changes mode only when it goes up or down a staircase to a + different level, though not all level changes produce mode changes. + Mode changes occur only when entering or leaving an environment, or + when LaTeX is processing the argument of certain text-producing + commands. +<h2>Paragraph mode</h2> + Paragraph mode is the most common; it's the one LaTeX is in when + processing ordinary text. In that mode, LaTeX breaks your text into + lines and breaks the lines into pages. +<p> + There + are also several text-producing commands and environments for making a + box that put LaTeX in paragraph mode. The box made by one of these + commands or environments will be called a + <a href="ltx-294.html">parbox</a>. When LaTeX is in + paragraph mode while making a box, it is said to be in inner paragraph + mode. The normal paragraph mode, in which LaTeX starts out, is called + outer paragraph mode. + +<h2>Math mode</h2> + LaTeX is in math mode when it's generating a mathematical formula. It is + in math mode in the <a href="ltx-115.html#math">math</a>, + <a href="ltx-421.html">displaymath</a>, <a href="ltx-224.html">equation</a>, + and <a href="ltx-223.html"> eqnarray</a> environments. +<p> + In math mode letters are assumed to be math symbols and spaced accordingly. + Spaces in the input are ignored, except that spaces may be needed to + delineate the end of commands. + +<h2>LR mode</h2> + In LR mode, as in paragraph + mode, LaTeX considers the output that it produces to be a string of + words with spaces between them. In LR mode, unlike paragraph and math modes, + spaces are not ignored; an input space creates an output space. + However, unlike paragraph mode, LaTeX + keeps going from left to right; it never starts a new line in LR mode. + Even if you put a hundred words into an + <a href="ltx-265.html"><tt>\mbox</tt></a>, LaTeX would keep + typesetting them from left to right inside a single box, and then + complain because the resulting box was too wide to fit on the line. +<p> + LaTeX is in LR mode when it starts making a box with an + <a href="ltx-265.html"><tt>\mbox</tt></a> command. + You can get it to enter a different mode inside the box - for example, + you can make it enter math mode to put a formula in the box. +<hr> +Also see <a href="ltx-115.html">Math Formulas</a><br> +Go to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a><br> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 31 May 1995. +</address> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-131.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-131.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..70e27e88524 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-131.html @@ -0,0 +1,24 @@ +<html> +<head><title>Help On LaTeX Page Styles</title></head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">Page Styles</font></h1> +<p> + The <tt>\documentstyle</tt> command determines the size and position of the + page's head and foot. The page style determines what goes in them. + +<H2>Subtopics</H2> +<ul> +<li><A href="ltx-263.html"><tt>\maketitle</tt></A> +<li><A href="ltx-137.html"><tt>\pagenumbering</tt></A> +<li><A href="ltx-138.html"><tt>\pagestyle</tt></A> +<li><A href="ltx-140.html"><tt>\thispagestyle</tt></A> +<li><a href="ltx-329.html"><tt>\title</tt></a> +</ul> +<hr> +Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 17 May 1995. +</address> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-137.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-137.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..59134f72b88 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-137.html @@ -0,0 +1,30 @@ +<html> +<head><title>Help On LaTeX \pagenumbering</title></head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\pagenumbering</font></h1> +<p> + <tt>\pagenumbering{num_style}</tt> +<p> + + Specifies the style of page numbers. Possible values of num_style are: +<p> + +<ul> +<li><TT>arabic</TT> Arabic numerals +<li><TT>roman</TT> Lowercase roman numerals +<li><TT>Roman</TT> Uppercase roman numerals +<li><TT>alph</TT> Lowercase letters +<li><TT>Alph</TT> Uppercase letters +</ul> +<hr> +See also <a href="ltx-131.html">Page Styles</a><br> +For page numbering, see <a href="ltx-3.html">Counters</a><br> +To refer to a page number in the text, see + <a href="ltx-291.html"><tt>\pageref</tt></a><br> +Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 20 Oct 1995. +</address> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-138.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-138.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..cd6fd4b67c7 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-138.html @@ -0,0 +1,31 @@ +<html> +<head><title>Help On LaTeX \pagestyle</title></head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\pagestyle</font></h1> + <tt>\pagestyle{option}</tt> +<p> + The <tt>\pagestyle</tt> <a href="declarations.html">declaration</a> + changes the style from the current page on + throughout the remainder of your document. +<p> + The valid options are: +<ul> +<li><TT>plain</TT> Just a plain page number. +<li><TT>empty</TT> Produces empty heads and feet - no page numbers. +<li><TT>headings</TT> Puts running headings on each page. The document + style specifies what goes in the headings. +<li><TT>myheadings</TT> You specify what is to go in the heading with the + <tt>\markboth</tt> or the <tt>\markright</tt> commands. +</ul> +<hr> +See also +<A href="ltx-264.html"><tt>\markboth</tt> and + <tt>\markright</tt></A><br> +See also <a href="ltx-131.html">Page Styles</a><br> +Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 29 Jun 1995. +</address> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-140.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-140.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..14882e118a0 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-140.html @@ -0,0 +1,20 @@ +<html> +<head><title>Help On LaTeX \thispagestyle</title> +</head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\thispagestyle</font></h1> +<p> + <tt>\thispagestyle{option}</tt> +<p> + The <tt>\thispagestyle</tt> command works in the same manner as the + <a href="ltx-138.html"><tt>\pagestyle</tt></a> + command except that it changes the style for the current page only. +<hr> +See also <a href="ltx-131.html">Page Styles</a><br> +Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 17 May 1995. +</address> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-141.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-141.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..41f2a04db26 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-141.html @@ -0,0 +1,70 @@ +<html> +<head><title>Help On LaTeX Sectioning</title></head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">Sectioning</font></h1> +<p> + Sectioning commands provide the means to structure your text into + units. The <a href="ltx-22.html">document style</a> determines which + sectioning commands are supported. They should be used with the + following heirarchy: + <ul> + <li><tt>\part</tt> + <li><tt>\chapter</tt> (report style only) + <li><tt>\section</tt> + <li><tt>\subsection</tt> + <li><tt>\subsubsection</tt> + <li><tt>\paragraph</tt> + <li><tt>\subparagraph</tt> + <li><tt>\subsubparagraph</tt> (milstd and book-form styles only) + <li><tt>\subsubsubparagraph</tt> (milstd and book-form styles only) + </ul> +<p> + The <a href="ltx-3.html">counter</a> for each level is reset when the + level above is incremented (except chapters are numbered sequentially + regardless of the part). +<p> + All sectioning commands take the same general form: +<pre> + <tt>\chapter[optional]{title}</tt> + <a href="ltx-252.html">\label{lab}</a> <a href="ltx-434.html">%</a> optional, for cross referencing + text for this unit ... + ... +</pre> + In addition to providing the heading in the text, the mandatory + argument of the sectioning command can appear in two other places: +<ol> + <li>the table of contents + <li>the running head at the top of the page +</ol> + You may not want the same thing to appear in these other two places as + appears in the text heading. To handle this situation, the sectioning + commands have an optional argument that provides the text for these + other two purposes. +<p> +The <tt>title</tt> or <tt>optional</tt> title are moving arguments so +<a href="fragile.html">fragile</a> commands contained in these +arguments must be protected. +<p> + All the sectioning commands have *-forms that print a title, but do not + print a number with the title and do not incement the relevant + <a href="ltx-3.html">counter</a> and do not make an entry in the + <a href="toc.html">table of contents</a>. +<p> + A blank line before or after a sectioning command has no effect. +<hr> +Related topics +<ul> +<li><a href="ltx-252.html"><tt>\label</tt></a> +<li><A href="ltx-142.html"><tt>\appendix</tt></A> +</ul> +<hr> +See also <a href="ltx-3.html">Counters</a>, + <a href="ltx-13.html">Cross References</a><br> +See also <a href="toc.html">Table of Contents</a><br> +Back to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 14 Jul 1995. +</address> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-142.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-142.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..843f696d7c4 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-142.html @@ -0,0 +1,19 @@ +<html> +<head><title>Help On LaTeX \appendix</title> +</head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\appendix</font></h1> + <tt>\appendix</tt> +<p> + The <tt>\appendix</tt> command changes the way sectional units are numbered. + It generates no text. However, <a href="ltx-141.html">section commands</a> + after the <tt>\appendix</tt> command are numbered accordingly. + +<hr> +Return to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 30 Oct 1995. +</address> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-143.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-143.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..12207070528 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-143.html @@ -0,0 +1,149 @@ +<html> +<head> +<title>Help On LaTeX Spaces and Boxes</title> +</head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">Spaces and Boxes</font></h1> + +<h2>"Visible" Spaces</h2> +You can generate a "visible" space, generally indicated as a small, squat +"u," and useful in didactic material by using the +<a href="ltx-342.html"><tt>\verb</tt></a> command or the +<a href="ltx-79.html"><tt>verbatim</tt></a> environment. + +<h2>Non-breaking Spaces</h2> +To generate a space where you do not want to allow a break for a new line use a +<tt>~</tt>. For example, +<pre> + <tt>... in Table~2 and Fig.~3 ...</tt> +</pre> + +<h2>Controlling Space in Text</h2> + +The ends of words and sentences are marked +in the input by one or more spaces. LaTeX +treats multiple spaces as if they were a single space. An end of line +is also equivalent to a space; however, you can end a line +<em>without</em> a space by using a +<a href="ltx-434.html"><tt>%</tt></a> (anything following the +<tt>%</tt> is considered to be +a comment). LaTeX generally ignores spaces at the beginning of lines. +<p> +Paragraphs are +delineated by a <em>blank line</em> -- one which does not contain even +comments (anything following a +<a href="ltx-434.html"><tt>%</tt></a> until the end of a line is +a comment). See also the <a href="ltx-293.html"><tt>\par</tt></a> +command. +<p> +LaTeX leaves extra space after punctuation, such as the period which +ends a sentence, +but, it uses a very simple rule (periods end sentences unless +they follow a capital letter) so +sometimes it needs a little help in determining when +this is required. (However, see +<a href="frenchsp.html"><tt>\frenchspacing</tt></a>.) +Use +<ul> +<li><a href="ltx-431.html"><tt>\<space></tt></a> to create an ordinary + interword space +<li><a href="ltx-432.html"><tt>\@</tt></a> before punctuation to force an "end of + sentence" space +</ul> +<p> +It is sometimes necessary to add a little additional space, such as between +consecutive single and double <a href="ltx-433.html">quotation marks</a>. +The <a href="ltx-185.html"><tt>\,</tt></a> command can be used for this purpose. +<p> +Also see +<ul> +<li><a href="ltx-430.html">Dashes</a> +<li><a href="ellipses.html">Ellipses</a> +<li><a href="ltx-433.html">Quotation Marks</a> +<li><a href="ltx-118.html">Spacing in Math Mode</a> +</ul> + +<h2>Spaces after Commands</h2> + +Most LaTeX commands consist of a <tt>\</tt> followed by a string of +letters. The end of such commands is indicated by a nonletter, i.e., +a number, a punctuation mark, a space, or the end of the line. If the +command produces text and you want a space to follow this text, you cannot +just leave a space after the command; that space is treated as the +end-of-command signal and several spaces are equivalent to one in LaTeX. +To generate a space after a text-producing command you can use +<a href="ltx-431.html"><tt>\<space></tt></a>. +<p> +For example +<pre> + <tt>I wrote this on <a href="ltx-330.html">\today</a> .</tt> +</pre> +generates "I wrote this on Jul 7, 1995." Note that the spaces +between <tt>\today</tt> and the period in the input do not generate +any space in the output. On the other hand, +<pre> + <tt>\today\ was a good day.</tt> +</pre> +or +<pre> + <tt>\today \ was a good day.</tt> +</pre> +will both produce "Jul 7, 1995 was a good day." The +<a href="ltx-431.html"><tt>\<space></tt></a> +here is necessary to produce space between the date and "was." +<p> +An alternatative is to use braces to terminate the command. For +example, <tt>\today{} was ...</tt> is equivalent to the above. + +<h3>Invisible commands</h3> +Some commands do not produce any output text. LaTeX treats these as +words of zero length and may try to leave spaces both before and +after this "word" which will generally produce an undesirable gap. +This can be avoided by attaching these commands directly to the +preceding word, i.e., leaving no spaces. + +<H2>Some commands which create or manipulate space</H2> +<ul> +<li><A href="ltx-198.html">\addvspace</A> +<li><A href="ltx-206.html">\bigskip</A> +<li><A href="ltx-220.html">\dotfill</A> +<li><A href="ltx-238.html">\hfill</A> +<li><A href="ltx-240.html">\hrulefill</A> +<li><A href="ltx-241.html">\hspace</A> +<li><A href="ltx-266.html">\medskip</A> +<li><A href="ltx-306.html">\rule</A> +<li><A href="ltx-318.html">\smallskip</A> +<li><A href="ltx-345.html">\vfill</A> +<li><A href="ltx-347.html">\vspace</A> +</ul> +See also +<ul> +<li><a href="ltx-118.html">spacing in math mode</a> +</ul> + +<h2>Boxes</h2> +A box is an object which TeX treats as a single character; it is therefore +not broken across lines or pages. +<p> +The following commands create or manipulate boxes +<ul> +<li><A href="ltx-226.html">\fbox</A> +<li><A href="ltx-237.html">\framebox</A> +<li><A href="ltx-262.html">\makebox</A> +<li><A href="ltx-265.html">\mbox</A> +<li><A href="ltx-277.html">\newsavebox</A> +<li><A href="ltx-294.html">\parbox</A> +<li><A href="ltx-302.html">\raisebox</A> +<li><A href="ltx-307.html">\savebox</A> +<li><A href="ltx-307.html">\sbox</A> +<li><A href="ltx-337.html">\usebox</A> +</ul> + +<hr> +Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 29 Sep 1995. +</address> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-164.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-164.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..342a3e4219d --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-164.html @@ -0,0 +1,68 @@ +<html> +<head><title>Help On LaTeX Special Characters</title></head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">Special Characters</font></h1> +<p> + The following characters play a special role in LaTeX and are called + special printing characters, or simply special characters. +<pre> + # $ % & ~ _ ^ <tt>\</tt> { } +</pre> + Whenever you put one of these special characters into your file, you + are doing something special, as described below. +<p> + If you simply want the character to be + printed just as any other letter, include a <tt>\</tt> in front of the + character. For example, <tt>\$</tt> will produce $ in your output. +<br> + Exceptions to this rule: +<ul> +<li><tt>\</tt> itself because + <a href="ltx-181.html"><tt>\\</tt></a> has its own + special meaning. Use <tt>$\backslash$</tt>. +<li><tt>~</tt> and <tt>^</tt> because <tt>\~</tt> and <tt>\^</tt> produce + <a href="ltx-401.html">accents</a>. Use + <a href="ltx-342.html"><tt>\verb</tt></a> or the + <a href="ltx-79.html">verbatim environment</a>. + +</ul> +<h2>#</h2> +The number (pound) sign is used to define use of arguments, for example, +in the <a href="ltx-18.html"><tt>\newcommand</tt></a> command. +<h2>$</h2> +The dollar sign is used to delineate <a href="ltx-115.html#math">math</a> and +<a href="ltx-421.html">displaymath</a> Enviroments. +<h2>%</h2> +The percent sign is used to insert <a href="ltx-434.html">Comments</a> in the +input file, and to allow line breaks without generating a space. +<h2>&</h2> +The ampersand is used to separate items in the <a href="ltx-202.html">array</a> +and <a href="ltx-68.html">tabular</a> Enviroments. +<h2>~</h2> +The tilde generates a <a href="ltx-143.html">nonbreaking space</a> +To create a tilde in the output, use + <a href="ltx-342.html"><tt>\verb</tt></a> or the + <a href="ltx-79.html">verbatim environment</a> (or cheat by using + <tt>\~{}</tt>, i.e., placing a + <a href="ltx-401.html">tilde accent</a> over a "blank" letter). +<h2>_</h2> +The underscore is used to create <a href="ltx-179.html">subscripts</a> +<h2>^</h2>The carat (circumflex) symbol generates +<a href="ltx-180.html">superscripts</a>. + To create a carat in the output + use <a href="ltx-342.html"><tt>\verb</tt></a> or the + <a href="ltx-79.html">verbatim environment</a>. +<h2>\ , { , and }</h2> +The backslash and braces are used in +<a href="ltx-17.html">command</a> definitions, for enclosing +command arguments, and for delimiting scopes of +<a href="declarations.html">declarations</a>. +<hr> +See also <a href="input.html">Input to LaTeX</a><br> +Return to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 15 Jul 1995. +</address> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-165.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-165.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..0acce481a0d --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-165.html @@ -0,0 +1,24 @@ +<html> +<head><title>Help On LaTeX Splitting the Input</title></head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">Splitting the Input</font></h1> + A large document requires a lot of input. Rather than putting the + whole input in a single large file, it's more efficient to split it + into several smaller ones. Regardless of how many separate files you + use, there is one that is the root file; it is the one whose name you + type when you run LaTeX. + +<H2>Subtopics</H2> +<ul> +<li><A href="ltx-245.html">\include</A> +<li><A href="ltx-246.html">\includeonly</A> +<li><A href="ltx-248.html">\input</A> +</ul> +<hr> +Return to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 29 Sep 1995. +</address> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-169.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-169.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..bfcf7224ec0 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-169.html @@ -0,0 +1,26 @@ +<html> +<head><title>Help On LaTeX Starting and Ending</title></head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">Starting and Ending</font></h1> +<p> + Your input file must contain the following commands as a minimum. +<pre><tt> + <a href="ltx-22.html">\documentstyle{style}</a> + \begin{document} + ... your text goes here ... + \end{document} +</tt></pre> + where the <tt>style</tt> selected is one the valid styles for LaTeX; see + <a href="ltx-22.html">Document Styles</a>. +<p> + You may include other LaTeX commands between the <tt>\documentstyle</tt> and + the <tt>\begin{document}</tt> commands. +<hr> +See also <a href="input.html">Input to LaTeX</a><br> +Return to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 23 Jun 1995. +</address> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-17.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-17.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..54755ef470a --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-17.html @@ -0,0 +1,51 @@ +<html> +<head><title>Help On LaTeX Commands</title> +</head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> + +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">LaTex Commands</font></h1> + +<p>Commands take one of two forms:</p> + +<ul> + <li>a backslash (<tt>\</tt>) followed by a single special character + <li>a backslash (<tt>\</tt>) followed by a string of letters +</ul> + +<p>The second case is case-sensitive; +<a href="ltx-405.html"><tt>\Gamma</tt></a> is different from +<a href="ltx-405.html"><tt>\gamma</tt></a>. +These commands are terminated by a nonletter, i.e., a blank, a number, +a punctuation mark or special character. </p> + +<p>For commands which produce text a trailing blank is interpreted as the +end of the command, which does not automatically create a space, so +you may have to do something to create an +<a href="ltx-431.html">interword space</a> after this text.</p> + +<p>Commands may have mandatory arguments, which are input in braces +(<tt>{}</tt>). +They may also have optional arguments, which are input in square brackets +(<tt>[]</tt>).</p> + +<H2>Defining new commands, etc.</H2> + +<p>See: </p> + +<ul> +<li><A href="ltx-18.html"><tt>\newcommand</tt></A> +<li><A href="ltx-19.html"><tt>\newenvironment</tt></A> +<li><A href="ltx-20.html"><tt>\newtheorem</tt></A> +<li><A href="ltx-21.html"><tt>\newfont</tt></A> +</ul> +These must be used for entities which are not already defined. To +redefine something use, for example, +<A href="ltx-18.html"><tt>\renewcommand</tt></A>. +<hr> +Return to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 03 Nov 1995. +</address> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-170.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-170.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..4246f9dee24 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-170.html @@ -0,0 +1,41 @@ +<html> +<head><title>Help On LaTeX Table of Contents</title></head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">Table of Contents</font></h1> +<p> + A table of contents is produced with the + <a href="toc.html"><tt>\tableofcontents</tt></a> command. You + put the command right where you want the table of contents to go; + LaTeX does the rest for you. + Entries are taken from the <a href="ltx-141.html">Sectioning</a> commands. +<p> + <tt>\tableofcontents</tt> produces a heading, but it does not + automatically start a new page. If you want a new page after the + table of contents, include a + <a href="ltx-276.html"><tt>\newpage</tt></a> command after the + <tt>\tableofcontents</tt> command. +<p> + There are similar commands <tt>\listoffigures</tt> and + <tt>\listoftables</tt> for + producing a list of figures and a list of tables, respectively. + Everything works exactly the same as for the table of contents. +<p> + NOTE: Information for these tables and lists are placed in an auxiliary file + and you may have to run latex twice to get it to come out correctly. + If you want any of these items to be generated, you can not + have the <tt>\nofiles</tt> command in your document as that would suppress + writing of the auxiliary files. +See also +<ul> +<li><a href="toc.html"><tt>\tableofcontents</tt></a> +<li><A href="ltx-171.html"><tt>\addcontentsline</tt></A> +<li><A href="ltx-172.html"><tt>\addtocontents</tt></A> +</ul> +<hr> +Return to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 27 Sep 1995. +</address> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-171.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-171.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..a6cfc68d9f4 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-171.html @@ -0,0 +1,32 @@ +<html> +<head><title>Help On LaTeX \addcontentsline</title></head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\addcontentsline</font></h1> + <tt>\addcontentsline{file}{sec_unit}{entry}</tt> +<p> + The <tt>\addcontentsline</tt> command adds an entry to the specified list or + table where +<ul> +<li><tt>file</tt> is the extension of the file on which information is to be + written: toc (table of contents), lof (list of figures), or lot + (list of tables). +<li><tt>sec_unit</tt> controls the formatting of the entry. It should be one + of the following, depending upon the value of the file argument: + <ul> + <li><TT>toc</TT> the name of the sectional unit, such as part or + subsection. + <li><TT>lof</TT> figure + <li><TT>lot</TT> table + </ul> +<li><tt>entry</tt> is the text of the entry. +</ul> +<p> +<hr> +See also <a href="ltx-170.html">Table of Contents</a><br> +Return to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 28 Jun 1995. +</address> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-172.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-172.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..32423986d3d --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-172.html @@ -0,0 +1,24 @@ +<html> +<head><title>Help On LaTeX \addtocontents</title></head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\addtocontents</font></h1> + <tt>\addtocontents{file}{text}</tt> +<p> + The <tt>\addtocontents</tt> command adds text (or formatting commands) directly + to the file that generates the table of contents or list of figures or + tables. +<ul> +<li><tt>file</tt> is the extension of the file on which information is to be + written: toc (table of contents), lof (list of figures), or lot + (list of tables). +<li><tt>text</tt> is the information to be written. +</ul> +<hr> +See also <a href="ltx-170.html">Table of Contents</a><br> +Return to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 28 Jun 1995. +</address> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-173.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-173.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..5e94279d73a --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-173.html @@ -0,0 +1,18 @@ +<html> +<head><title>Help On LaTeX Terminal Input and Output</title> +</head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">Terminal Input and Output</font></h1> +Input from or output to the terminal is controlled by +<ul> +<li><A href="ltx-174.html">\typeout</A> +<li><A href="ltx-175.html">\typein</A> +</ul> +<hr> +Return to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 29 Sep 1995. +</address> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-174.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-174.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..6cf8f287e3c --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-174.html @@ -0,0 +1,25 @@ +<html><head><title>Help On LaTeX \typeout</title> +</head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\typeout</font></h1> +<p> + <tt>\typeout{msg}</tt> +<p> + Prints <tt>msg</tt> on the terminal and in the log file. Commands in + <tt>msg</tt> that are defined with <a href="ltx-18.html"><tt>\newcommand</tt> + or <tt>\renewcommand</tt></a> are replaced by their + definitions before being printed. +<p> + LaTeX's usual rules for treating multiple spaces as a single space and + ignoring spaces after a command name apply to <tt>msg</tt>. + A <a href="ltx-431.html"<tt>\<space></tt></a> command + in <tt>msg</tt> causes a single space to be printed. +<hr> +See also <A href="ltx-173.html">Terminal Input and Output</A><br> +Go to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 29 Sep 1995. +</address> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-175.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-175.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..b466a07ef25 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-175.html @@ -0,0 +1,22 @@ +<html> +<head><title>Help On LaTeX \typein</title> +</head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\typein</font></h1> + <tt>\typein[cmd]{msg}</tt> +<p> + Prints <tt>msg</tt> on the terminal and causes LaTeX to stop and wait for you + to type a line of input, ending with return. If the <tt>cmd</tt> argument is + missing, the typed input is processed as if it had been included in + the input file in place of the <tt>\typein</tt> command. If the <tt>cmd</tt> + argument is present, it must be a command name. This command name is then + defined or redefined to be the typed input. +<hr> +See also <A href="ltx-173.html">Terminal Input and Output</A><br> +Go to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 29 Sep 1995. +</address> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-176.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-176.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..9606ffcc49f --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-176.html @@ -0,0 +1,26 @@ +<html> +<head><title>Help On LaTeX Typefaces</title></head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">Typefaces</font></h1> +<p> + The typeface is specified by giving the size and style. A typeface is + also called a font. +<p> + In <a href="versions.html">LaTeX2e</a> the "styles" are replaced by a + <a href="fonts2e.html">Font Selection</a> scheme. + +<H2>Subtopics</H2> +<ul> +<li><A href="ltx-177.html">Styles</A> +<li><A href="ltx-178.html">Sizes</A> +<li><a href="mathfonts.html">Math fonts and styles</a> +<li><a href="fonts2e.html">LaTeX2e Font Selection</a> +</ul> +<hr> +Return to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 19 May 1995. +</address> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-177.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-177.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..36d68f86c0b --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-177.html @@ -0,0 +1,55 @@ +<html> +<head><title>Help On LaTeX Styles</title></head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">Styles</font></h1> + The following type style commands are supported by LaTeX. Note + that <a href="versions.html">LaTeX2e</a> differs on this point, + having instead a <a href="fonts2e.html">Font Selection</a> scheme, + but the following should still work (certainly in 2.09 mode). + <ul> + <li><a href="ltx-304.html"><tt>\rm</tt></a> Roman. + <li><a href="ltx-249.html"><tt>\it</tt></a> Italics. + <li><a href="ltx-221.html"><tt>\em</tt></a> Emphasis + (toggles between <tt>\it</tt> and <tt>\rm</tt>). + <li><a href="emph.html"><tt>\emph</tt></a> (LaTeX2e emphasis command) + <li><a href="ltx-204.html"><tt>\bf</tt></a> Boldface. + <li><a href="ltx-316.html"><tt>\sl</tt></a> Slanted. + <li><a href="ltx-313.html"><tt>\sf</tt></a> Sans serif. + <li><a href="ltx-308.html"><tt>\sc</tt></a> Small caps. + <li><a href="ltx-331.html"><tt>\tt</tt></a> Typewriter. +<p> + <li><a href="boldmath.html"><tt>\boldmath</tt> and <tt>\unboldmath</tt></a> + (affects math mode fonts only) + </ul> +These are LaTeX +<a href="declarations.html"><em>delcarations</em></a> (with the exception of +<a href="emph.html"><tt>\emph</tt></a>), +i.e., they do not act on an argument, but change the way LaTeX prints the +following text. The <em>scope</em> of a declaration is ended by a right +brace (<tt>}</tt>) or an <tt>\end{}</tt> command whose matching +left brace (<tt>{</tt>) or <tt>\begin{}</tt> precedes the declaration. +<p> +Thus, for a short piece of italics or bold-face text one would use +<pre> + This is {\it italics} and this is {\bf in boldface}. +</pre> +which would be set as "This is <em>italics</em> and this is +<strong>in boldface</strong>. +<p> +In LaTeX2e the +<a href="emph.html"><tt>\emph</tt></a> command is considered more +suitable for short stretches of emphasized text. A typical use would be +<pre> + <tt>This is \emph{emphasized text}.</tt> +</pre> +<hr> +See also Typeface <a href="ltx-178.html">Sizes</a><br> +LaTeX2e <a href="fonts2e.html">Font Selection</a><br> +See also <a href="mathfonts.html">Math fonts and styles</a><br> +Return to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 19 May 1995. +</address> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-178.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-178.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..e29edcf5d4a --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-178.html @@ -0,0 +1,44 @@ +<html> +<head><title>Help On LaTeX Sizes</title></head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">Sizes</font></h1> + The following type size commands, in order of increasing font size, + are supported by LaTeX. +<ul> + <li><a href="ltx-328.html"><tt>\tiny</tt></a> + <li><a href="ltx-309.html"><tt>\scriptsize</tt></a> + <li><a href="ltx-233.html"><tt>\footnotesize</tt></a> + <li><a href="ltx-317.html"><tt>\small</tt></a> + <li><a href="ltx-282.html"><tt>\normalsize</tt></a> (default) + <li><a href="ltx-253.html"><tt>\large</tt></a> + <li><a href="ltx-254.html"><tt>\Large</tt></a> (capital "l") + <li><a href="ltx-255.html"><tt>\LARGE</tt></a> (all caps) + <li><a href="ltx-242.html"><tt>\huge</tt></a> + <li><a href="ltx-243.html"><tt>\Huge</tt></a> (capital "h") +</ul> +The default for <tt>\normalsize</tt> is 10-point, but it may differ +for some <a href="ltx-22.html">Document Styles</a> or their options. +The actual size produced by these commands also depends on the Document +Style and, in some styles, more than one of these size commands may produce +the same actual size. +<p> +The new size takes effect immediately after the size command; +if an entire paragraph or unit is set in a certain size, the size command +should include the blank line or the <tt>\end{}</tt> which delimites +the unit. (See <a href="declarations.html">Declarations</a>.) +<p> +These commands cannot be used in <a href="ltx-130.html">math mode</a>. +However, part of a formula may be set in a different size by using +an <a href="ltx-265.html"><tt>\mbox</tt></a> command containing the +size command. +<hr> +See also Typeface <a href="ltx-177.html">Styles</a>, + <a href="fonts2e.html">LaTeX2e Font Selection</a><br> +See also <a href="mathfonts.html">Math fonts and styles</a><br> +Return to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 14 May 1995. +</address> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-179.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-179.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..8635de367ef --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-179.html @@ -0,0 +1,35 @@ +<html> +<head><title>Help On LaTeX subscripts</title></head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">Subscripts</font></h1> +<p> + To get an expression, <tt>exp</tt>, to appear as a subscript, you just type + <tt>_{exp}</tt>.<p> + Can be used only in <a href="ltx-115.html#math">math</a> mode. + Thus, for a simple expression that is part of the running text: +<pre> + <tt>H$_2$O is the formula for water</tt> +</pre> +should display as "H<sub>2</sub>O is the formula for water". +Note that the braces around the argument may be omitted if the +subscript is a single character. +<p> +If a symbol has both subscripts and superscripts, the order doesn't matter. +The following are equivalent:<br> +<pre> <tt>a_n^2</tt> and <tt>a^2_n</tt></pre> +<p> +Subscripts are normally displayed in a smaller font; to prevent this and, +for example, use a standard Roman font, one would use; +<pre> + <tt>$J_{<a href="ltx-304.html">\rm</a> Roman}$</tt> +</pre> +<hr> + See also: <A href="ltx-115.html">Math Formulas</A>, + <A href="ltx-180.html">Superscripts</A><br> +Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 31 May 1995. +</address> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-18.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-18.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..715be743f32 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-18.html @@ -0,0 +1,88 @@ +<html> +<head><title>Help On LaTeX \newcommand and \renewcommand</title></head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\newcommand \renewcommand</font></h1> +<p> + <tt>\newcommand{cmd}[args][opt]{def}</tt> +<br> + <tt>\renewcommand{cmd}[args][opt]{def}</tt> +<br> + <tt>\providecommand{cmd}[args][opt]{def}</tt> -- + <a href="versions.html">LaTeX2e</a> +<p> + These commands define (or redefine) a command. +<ul> +<li><TT>cmd</TT> The name of the new or redefined command. + A <tt>\</tt> followed by a string of lower and/or uppercase + letters or a <tt>\</tt> followed by a single nonletter. + For <tt>\newcommand</tt> the name must + not be already defined and must not begin with <tt>\end</tt>; for + <tt>\renewcommand</tt> it must already be defined. The + <tt>\providecommand</tt> command is identical to the <tt>\newcommand</tt> + command if a command with this name does not exist; if it does + already exist, the <tt>\providecommand</tt> does nothing and the + old definition remains in effect. +<p> +<li><TT>args</TT> An integer from 1 to 9 denoting the number of arguments of + the command being defined. The default is for the command to + have no arguments. +<p> +<li><tt>opt</tt> (<strong><a href="versions.html">LaTeX2e only</a></strong>) + If present, then the first of the number of arguments specified by + <tt>args</tt> is optional with a default value of <tt>opt</tt>; + if absent, then all of the arguments are required. +<p> +<li><TT>def</TT> The text to be substituted for every occurrence of cmd; a + parameter of the form #n in cmd is replaced by the text of the + nth argument when this substitution takes place. +</ul> +<h2>Examples</h2> +<tt>\newcommand{\water}{H$_2$O}</tt> +<p> +This would allow one to write, e.g., +<pre> + The formula for water is \water. +</pre> +or +<pre> + \water\ is the formula for water. +</pre> +Note, in the second case, the trailing <tt>\</tt> followed by a blank +is required to ensure a blank space after the H<sub>2</sub>O; +LaTeX ignores the blank following a command, so the space has +to be specifically inserted with the +<a href="ltx-431.html"><tt>\<space></tt></a>. +<p> +As a second example consider +<p> +<tt>\newcommand{\hypotenuse}{$a^{2}+b^{2}$}</tt> +<p> +Note that this will produce the desired formula +in text (paragraph) mode because of the <tt>$...$</tt> in the definition. +In math mode, however, the first <tt>$</tt> +in the definition will cause LaTeX to leave math mode, causing problems. +<p> +In <strong>LaTeX 2.09</strong> a standard trick for getting around this is +to put the math-mode expression in an +<a href="ltx-265.html"><tt>\mbox</tt></a>, viz., +<pre> + <tt>\newcommand{\hypotenuse}{\mbox{$a^{2}+b^{2}$}}</tt> +</pre> +<p> +In <strong>LaTeX2e</strong> the +<a href="ensuremath.html"><tt>\ensuremath</tt></a> command has been +provided to alleviate this problem. The argument of the <tt>\ensuremath</tt> +command is always processed in math mode, regardless of the current mode. +Using this mechanism the above could be written as +<pre> + <tt>\newcommand{\hypotenuse}{\ensuremath{a^{2}+y^{2}}}</tt> +</pre> +<hr> +See also <a href="ltx-17.html">Commands</a><br> +Go to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a><br> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 23 Jun 1995. +</address> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-180.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-180.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..f1dc0b481e7 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-180.html @@ -0,0 +1,40 @@ +<html> +<head><title>Help On LaTeX Superscripts</title></head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">Superscripts</font></h1> +<p> + To get an expression, exp, to appear as a superscript, you just type + <tt>^{exp}</tt>.<p> + Can be used only in <a href="ltx-115.html#math">math</a> mode. +Thus, for a simple expression that is part of the running text: +<pre> + <tt>x$^3$ is the third power of x</tt> +</pre> +should display as "x<sup>3</sup> is the third power of x". Note that +the braces around the argument may be omitted if the superscript is +a single character. +<p> +If a symbol has both subscripts and superscripts, the order doesn't matter. +The following are equivalent:<br> +<pre> <tt>a_n^2</tt> and <tt>a^2_n</tt></pre> +<p> +Superscripts may have their own superscripts: +<pre> + <tt>$x^{y^{z}}$</tt> +</pre> +should display something like +<pre> + z + y + x +</pre> +<hr> + See also: <A href="ltx-115.html">Math Formulas</A>, + <A href="ltx-179.html">Subscripts</A><br> +Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 31 May 1995. +</address> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-181.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-181.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..4c58f7aba77 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-181.html @@ -0,0 +1,27 @@ +<html> +<head><title>Help On LaTeX \\</title></head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\\</font></h1> +<p> + <tt>\\[*][extra-space]</tt> +<p> + The <tt>\\</tt> command tells LaTeX to start a new line. It has an optional + argument, extra-space, that specifies how much extra vertical space is + to be inserted before the next line. This can be a negative amount. +<p> + The <tt>\\*</tt> command is the same as the ordinary <tt>\\</tt> command except that it + tells LaTeX not to start a new page after the line. +<p> + These commands are <a href="fragile.html">fragile</a>. +<hr> +See also <A href="ltx-99.html">Line and Page Breaking</A><br> +See also <a href="ltx-202.html">Array</a>, + <a href="ltx-58.html">Tabbing</a>, and + <a href="ltx-68.html">Tabular</a> Environments<br> +Go to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 29 Sep 1995. +</address> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-182.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-182.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..e2f0ee12b6b --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-182.html @@ -0,0 +1,26 @@ +<html> +<head><title>Help On LaTeX \-</title></head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\-</font></h1> +<p> +<h2>In normal text</h2> + the <tt>\-</tt> command tells LaTeX that it may hyphenate the word at that + point. LaTeX is very good at hyphenating, and it will usually find + all correct hyphenation points. The <tt>\-</tt> command is used for the + exceptional cases. +<p> +<h2>In the <a href="ltx-58.html">tabbing</a> environment</h2> + the <tt>\-</tt> command moves the left margin of the next and all the following + commands one tab stop to the left. +<hr> +See also <A href="ltx-27.html">Environments</A>, + <A href="ltx-58.html">tabbing</A>, + <A href="ltx-99.html">Line and Page Breaking</A><br> +See also <a href="ltx-244.html"><tt>\hyphenation</tt></a><br> +Go to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 15 Jun 1995. +</address> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-183.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-183.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..daf7a958ded --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-183.html @@ -0,0 +1,17 @@ +<html> +<head><title>Help On LaTeX \;</title> +</head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\;</font></h1> + Include a thick space in <a href="ltx-115.html">math mode</a>. + +<hr> +See also <A href="ltx-115.html">Math Formulas</A>, + <A href="ltx-118.html">Spacing in Math Mode</A><br> +Return to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 29 Sep 1995. +</address> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-184.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-184.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..f363524f581 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-184.html @@ -0,0 +1,17 @@ +<html> +<head><title>Help On LaTeX \:</title> +</head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\:</font></h1> + Include a medium space in <a href="ltx-115.html">math mode</a>. + +<hr> +See also <A href="ltx-115.html">Math Formulas</A>, + <A href="ltx-118.html">Spacing in Math Mode</A><br> +Return to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 29 Sep 1995. +</address> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-185.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-185.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..fda562d9408 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-185.html @@ -0,0 +1,17 @@ +<html> +<head><title>Help On LaTeX \,</title> +</head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\,</font></h1> +<p> + Include a thin space; can be used in all <a href="ltx-130.html">modes</a>, + not just math. +<hr> +See also: <A href="ltx-115.html">Math Formulas</A>, + <A href="ltx-118.html">Spacing in Math Mode</A><br> +Return to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 10 May 1995. +</address> +</body></html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-186.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-186.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..8046229a6f1 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-186.html @@ -0,0 +1,17 @@ +<html> +<head><title>Help On LaTeX \!</title> +</head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\!</font></h1> + Include a negative thin space in <a href="ltx-115.html">math mode</a>. + +<hr> +See also <A href="ltx-115.html">Math Formulas</A>, + <A href="ltx-118.html">Spacing in Math Mode</A><br> +Return to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 29 Sep 1995. +</address> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-187.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-187.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..0a7ae1218df --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-187.html @@ -0,0 +1,20 @@ +<html> +<head><title>Help On LaTeX \=</title></head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\=</font></h1> +<h2>In normal text</h2> +Produces a macron <a href="ltx-401.html">accent</a> (an over bar) +on the following character. + +<h2>In the <a href="ltx-58.html">tabbing</a> environment</h2> + The <tt>\=</tt> command sets the tab stops. +<hr> +See also <A href="ltx-27.html">Environments</A>, + <A href="ltx-58.html">tabbing</A><br> +Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 8 May 1995. +</address> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-188.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-188.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..a022349e222 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-188.html @@ -0,0 +1,16 @@ +<html> +<head><title>Help On LaTeX \></title> +</head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\></font></h1> + The <tt>\></tt> command causes LaTeX to advance to the next tab stop. + +<hr> +See also <A href="ltx-58.html">tabbing</A><br> +Return to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 29 Sep 1995. +</address> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-189.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-189.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..9150944470a --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-189.html @@ -0,0 +1,17 @@ +<html> +<head><title>Help On LaTeX \<</title> +</head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\<</font></h1> + The <tt>\<</tt> command allows you to put something to the left of the local + margin without changing the margin. + +<hr> +See also <A href="ltx-58.html">tabbing</A><br> +Return to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 29 Sep 1995. +</address> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-19.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-19.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..a0474f32e71 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-19.html @@ -0,0 +1,50 @@ +<html> +<head><title>Help On LaTeX \newenvironment</title></head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\newenvironment</font></h1> + + <tt>\newenvironment{nam}[args]{begdef}{enddef}</tt> + <tt>\renewenvironment{nam}[args]{begdef}{enddef}</tt> +<p> + These commands define or redefine an environment. +<p> +<ul> +<li><TT>nam</TT> The name of the environment. + For <tt>\newenvironment</tt> there + must be no currently defined environment by that name, nor may the + command <tt>\nam</tt> be currently defined. For + <tt>\renewenvironment</tt> the + environment "<tt>nam</tt>" must already be defined. <tt>nam</tt> + may contain letters, numbers, and asterisks; it may <strong>not</strong> + begin with "end...". +<p> +<li><TT>args</TT> An integer from 1 to 9 denoting the number of arguments of + the newly-defined environment. The default is no arguments. +<p> +<li><TT>begdef</TT> The text substituted for every occurrence of + <tt>\begin{nam}</tt>; a parameter of the form <tt>#n</tt> in + <tt>begdef</tt> is replaced by + the text of the nth argument when this substitution takes place. +<p> +<li><TT>enddef</TT> The text substituted for every occurrence of + <tt>\end{nam}</tt>. It may not contain any argument parameters. +</ul> +<h2>Changes in <a href="versions.html">LaTeX2e</a></h2> +It is possible to have an optional argument, the form of the command being +<pre> + <tt>\newenvironment{nam}[args][opt]{begdef}{enddef} + \renewenvironment{nam}[args][opt]{begdef}{enddef}</tt> +</pre> +If <tt>opt</tt> is present, the first of the <tt>args</tt> arguments +is optional with default value <tt>opt</tt>. If it is absent all +arguments are mandatory. +<hr> +See also <a href="ltx-17.html">Defining commands</a>, +<a href="ltx-27.html">Environments</a><br> +Go to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 16 Nov 1995. +</address> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-190.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-190.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..edd61c28adf --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-190.html @@ -0,0 +1,17 @@ +<html> +<head><title>Help On LaTeX \+</title> +</head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\+</font></h1> + The <tt>\+</tt> command moves the left margin of the next and all the following + commands one tab stop to the right. + +<hr> +See also <A href="ltx-58.html">tabbing</A><br> +Return to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 29 Sep 1995. +</address> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-191.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-191.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..05f53f0e3d5 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-191.html @@ -0,0 +1,28 @@ +<html> +<head><title>Help On LaTeX \'</title></head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\'</font></h1> +<h2>In normal text</h2> +Produces an acute <a href="ltx-401.html">accent</a> on the following character. + +<h2>In the <a href="ltx-58.html">tabbing</a> environment</h2> + The <tt>\'</tt> command moves everything that you have typed so far in the + current column , everything starting from the most recent + <a href="ltx-188.html"><tt>\></tt></a>, + <a href="ltx-189.html"><tt>\<</tt></a>, + <a href="ltx-192.html"><tt> \'</tt></a>, + <a href="ltx-181.html"><tt>\\</tt></a>, + or + <a href="ltx-251.html"><tt>\kill</tt></a> + command, to the right of the previous column, flush + against the current column's tab stop. +<hr> +See also <A href="ltx-27.html">Environments</A>, +<A href="ltx-58.html">tabbing</A><br> + Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 1 May 1995. +</address> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-192.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-192.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..9ae2a1b7189 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-192.html @@ -0,0 +1,30 @@ +<html> +<head><title>Help On LaTeX \`</title></head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\`</font></h1> +<p> +<h2>In normal text</h2> +Produces a grave <a href="ltx-401.html">accent</a> on the following character. + +<h2>In the <a href="ltx-58.html">tabbing</a> environment</h2> + The <tt>\`</tt> command allows you to put text flushed right against any tab + stop, including tab stop 0. However, it can't move text to the right + of the last column because there's no tab stop there. The <tt>\`</tt> command + moves all the text that follows it, up to the + <a href="ltx-181.html"> <tt>\\</tt></a> or + <tt>\end{tabbing}</tt> + command that ends the line, to the right margin of the tabbing + environment. There must be no + <a href="ltx-188.html"><tt>\></tt></a> or + <a href="ltx-191.html"><tt>\'</tt></a> command between the <tt>\`</tt> and the + command that ends the line. +<hr> +See also <A href="ltx-27.html">Environments</A>, + <A href="ltx-58.html">tabbing</A><br> +Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 8 May 1995. +</address> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-195.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-195.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..64f5fabb3c8 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-195.html @@ -0,0 +1,20 @@ +<html> +<head><title>Help On LaTeX \addtocounter</title></head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\addtocounter</font></h1> +<p> + <tt>\addtocounter{counter}{value}</tt> +<p> + The <tt>\addtocounter</tt> command increments the <tt>counter</tt> + by the amount + specified by the <tt>value</tt> argument, + which can be negative. +<hr> +See also: <A href="ltx-3.html">Counters</A><br> +Go to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 2 May 1995. +</address> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-198.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-198.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..3b91b06f440 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-198.html @@ -0,0 +1,23 @@ +<html> +<head><title>Help On LaTeX \addvspace</title></head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\addvspace</font></h1> +<p> + <tt>\addvspace{length}</tt> +<p> + + The <tt>\addvspace</tt> command normally adds a vertical space of height + <tt>length</tt>. + However, if vertical space has already been added to the same + point in the output by a previous <tt>\addvspace</tt> command, then this + command will not add more space than needed to make the natural length + of the total vertical space equal to length. +<hr> +See <a href="ltx-143.html">Spaces and Boxes</a><br> +Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 10 May 1995. +</address> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-199.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-199.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..cee315a9884 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-199.html @@ -0,0 +1,22 @@ +<html> +<head><title>Help On LaTeX \alph</title></head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\alph</font></h1> + + <tt>\alph{counter}</tt> +<p> + This command causes the current value of <tt>counter</tt> to be printed in + alphabetic characters. The <tt>\alph</tt> command causes lower case alphabetic + characters, i.e., a, b, c..., while the <tt>\Alph</tt> command causes upper + case alphabetic characters, i.e., A, B, C... +<p> + The value of the counter must be less than 27. +<hr> +See also <A href="ltx-3.html">Counters</A><br> +Go to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 18 May 1995. +</address> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-2.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-2.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..9537a1851fa --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-2.html @@ -0,0 +1,328 @@ +<html> +<head><title>Help On LaTeX Commands</title></head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> + +<h2><font color="#cc0000">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font></h2> + +<hr width="10%" align=left> + +<h1><font color="#cc0000">Help by <a href="#subj">Subject</a>, +<a href="#cmd">Command</a>, or <a href="#env">Environment</a></font></h1> + + +<h2><a name="subj">Subjects</a></h2> + +<ul> + <li><a href="ltx-401.html">Accenting characters</a> (umlauts, graves, etc.) + <li><a href="ltx-202.html">Arrays</a> (math mode) + <li><a href="ltx-17.html">Commands</a>, defining and redefining + <li><a href="ltx-434.html">Comments in input file</a> + <li><a href="ltx-3.html">Counters</a> + <li><a href="ltx-13.html">Cross References</a> + <li><a href="ltx-430.html">Dashes</a> + <li><a href="declarations.html">Declarations</a> (changing how things look) + <li><a href="ltx-17.html">Defining New Commands</a> + <li><a href="ltx-22.html">Document Styles</a> + <li><a href="ltx-27.html">Environments</a> + (or see <a href="#env">list below</a>) + <li><a href="ltx-82.html">Footnotes</a> + <li><a href="ltx-176.html">Fonts</a> + <li><a href="fragile.html">Fragile commands</a> (and how to protect them) + <li><a href="input.html">Input to LaTeX</a> + <li><a href="ltx-402.html">International characters and punctuation</a> + <li><a href="ltx-86.html">Lengths</a> and how to change them + <li><a href="ltx-91.html">Letters</a> (as in "Dear John") + <li><a href="ltx-99.html">Line and Page Breaking</a> + <li><a href="lists.html">Lists</a> + <li><a href="ltx-111.html">Making Paragraphs</a> + <li><a href="ltx-115.html">Math Formulas</a> and + <a href="ltx-117.html">Math Symbols</a> + <li><a href="ltx-130.html">Modes</a> (paragraph, left-right, math) + <li><a href="ltx-402.html">Non-English characters and punctuation</a> + <li><a href="ltx-131.html">Page Styles</a> + <li><a href="ltx-43.html">Picture environment</a> + <li><a href="ltx-433.html">Quotation Marks</a> + <li><a href="ltx-141.html">Sectioning</a> + <li><a href="ltx-143.html">Spaces and Boxes</a> + <li><a href="ltx-164.html">Special Characters</a>: # $ % & ~ _ ^ \ { } + <li>Special Symbols + <ul> + <li><a href="ltx-401.html">Accents on characters</a> + (umlauts, graves, etc.) + <li><a href="ltx-406.html">Arrows</a> (math mode) + <li><a href="ltx-404.html">Binary and relational operators</a> (math mode) + <li><a href="ltx-403.html">Delimiters</a> + (parenthesis-like objects; math mode) + <li><a href="ellipses.html">Ellipses</a> + <li><a href="ltx-405.html">Greek letters</a> (math mode) + <li><a href="ltx-407.html">Miscellaneous symbols</a> + <li><a href="ltx-409.html">Math functions</a> + (sin, cos, log, ...; math mode) + <li><a href="ltx-408.html">Variable size math symbols</a> + (sums, integrals, ...; math mode) + </ul> + <li><a href="ltx-165.html">Splitting the Input</a> + <li><a href="ltx-169.html">Starting and Ending</a> + <li><a href="ltx-179.html">Subscripts</a> and + <a href="ltx-180.html">Superscripts</a> + <li><a href="ltx-67.html">Table</a>, + <a href="ltx-68.html">Tabular</a> and + <a href="ltx-58.html">Tabbing</a> Environments + <li><a href="ltx-170.html">Table of Contents</a> + <li><a href="ltx-173.html">Terminal Input and Output</a> + <li><a href="ltx-176.html">Typefaces</a> +</ul> + +<h2><a name="cmd">LaTeX Commands</a></h2> + +<p>A LaTeX command begins with the command name, which consists of a <tt>\</tt> +followed by either (a) a string of letters or (b) a single non-letter. +Arguments contained in square brackets [] are optional while arguments +contained in braces {} are required.</p> + +<p>NOTE: LaTeX is case sensitive. Enter all commands in lower case +unless explicitly directed to do otherwise.</p> + +<ul> + <li><a href="ltx-431.html"><tt>\<space></tt></a> (force ordinary space) + <li><a href="ltx-432.html"><tt>\@</tt></a> (following period ends sentence) + <li><a href="ltx-181.html"><tt>\\</tt></a> (new line) + <li><a href="ltx-185.html"><tt>\,</tt></a> (thin space) + <li><a href="ltx-183.html"><tt>\;</tt></a> (thick space, math mode) + <li><a href="ltx-184.html"><tt>\:</tt></a> (medium space, math mode) + <li><a href="ltx-186.html"><tt>\!</tt></a> (negative thin space, math mode) + <li><a href="ltx-182.html"><tt>\-</tt></a> + (hyphenation; <a href="ltx-58.html">tabbing</a>) + <li><a href="ltx-187.html"><tt>\=</tt></a> + (set tab, see <a href="ltx-58.html">tabbing</a>) + <li><a href="ltx-188.html"><tt>\></tt></a> + (tab, see <a href="ltx-58.html">tabbing</a>) + <li><a href="ltx-189.html"><tt>\<</tt></a> + (back tab, see <a href="ltx-58.html">tabbing</a>) + <li><a href="ltx-190.html"><tt>\+</tt></a> + (see <a href="ltx-58.html">tabbing</a>) + <li><a href="ltx-191.html"><tt>\'</tt></a> + (<a href="ltx-401.html">accent</a> or <a href="ltx-58.html">tabbing</a>) + <li><a href="ltx-192.html"><tt>\`</tt></a> + (<a href="ltx-401.html">accent</a> or <a href="ltx-58.html">tabbing</a>) + <li><a href="ltx-403.html"><tt>\|</tt></a> (double vertical lines, math mode) + <li><tt>\(</tt> and <tt>\)</tt> + (define <a href="ltx-115.html#math">math environment</a>) + <li><tt>\[</tt> and <tt>\]</tt> + (define <a href="ltx-421.html">displaymath environment</a>) + <li><a href="ltx-171.html">\addcontentsline</a> + <li><a href="ltx-172.html">\addtocontents</a> + <li><a href="ltx-195.html">\addtocounter</a> + <li><a href="ltx-93.html">\address</a> + <li><a href="ltx-89.html">\addtolength</a> + <li><a href="ltx-198.html">\addvspace</a> + <li><a href="ltx-199.html">\alph</a> + <li><a href="ltx-200.html">\appendix</a> + <li><a href="ltx-201.html">\arabic</a> + <li><a href="ltx-203.html">\author</a> + <li><a href="ltx-164.html">\backslash</a> + <li><a href="baselineskip.html">\baselineskip</a> + <li><a href="baselineskip.html">\baselinestretch</a> + <li><a href="ltx-204.html">\bf</a> + <li><a href="ltx-205.html">\bibitem</a> + <li><a href="ltx-206.html">\bigskip</a> + <li><a href="boldmath.html">\boldmath</a> + <li><a href="ltx-407.html">\cal</a> + <li><a href="caption.html">\caption</a> + <li><a href="ltx-207.html">\cdots</a> + <li><a href="ltx-30.html">\centering</a> + <li><a href="ltx-210.html">\circle</a> + <li><a href="ltx-211.html">\cite</a> + <li><a href="ltx-212.html">\cleardoublepage</a> + <li><a href="ltx-213.html">\clearpage</a> + <li><a href="ltx-214.html">\cline</a> + <li><a href="ltx-98.html">\closing</a> + <li><a href="ltx-216.html">\dashbox</a> + <li><a href="ltx-217.html">\date</a> + <li><a href="ltx-218.html">\ddots</a> + <li><a href="ltx-220.html">\dotfill</a> + <li><a href="ltx-221.html">\em</a> + <li><a href="ensuremath.html">\ensuremath</a> (LaTeX2e) + <li><a href="ltx-226.html">\fbox</a> + <li><a href="ltx-227.html">\flushbottom</a> + <li><a href="ltx-230.html">\fnsymbol</a> + <li><a href="ltx-231.html">\footnote</a> + <li><a href="ltx-232.html">\footnotemark</a> + <li><a href="ltx-233.html">\footnotesize</a> + <li><a href="ltx-234.html">\footnotetext</a> + <li><a href="ltx-235.html">\frac</a> + <li><a href="ltx-236.html">\frame</a> + <li><a href="ltx-237.html">\framebox</a> + <li><a href="frenchsp.html">\frenchspacing</a> + <li><a href="ltx-238.html">\hfill</a> + <li><a href="ltx-239.html">\hline</a> + <li><a href="ltx-240.html">\hrulefill</a> + <li><a href="ltx-241.html">\hspace</a> + <li><a href="ltx-242.html">\huge</a> + <li><a href="ltx-243.html">\Huge (capital "h")</a> + <li><a href="ltx-244.html">\hyphenation</a> + <li><a href="ltx-245.html">\include</a> + <li><a href="ltx-246.html">\includeonly</a> + <li><a href="ltx-247.html">\indent</a> + <li><a href="ltx-248.html">\input</a> + <li><a href="ltx-249.html">\it</a> + <li><a href="item.html">\item</a> + <li><a href="ltx-251.html">\kill</a> + <li><a href="ltx-252.html">\label</a> + <li><a href="ltx-253.html">\large</a> + <li><a href="ltx-254.html">\Large (capital "l")</a> + <li><a href="ltx-255.html">\LARGE (all caps)</a> + <li><a href="ltx-256.html">\ldots</a> + <li><a href="ltx-403.html#big">\left</a> + <li><a href="lefteqn.html">\lefteqn</a> + <li><a href="ltx-257.html">\line</a> + <li><a href="ltx-258.html">\linebreak</a> + <li><a href="ltx-259.html">\linethickness</a> + <li><a href="textwidth.html">\linewidth</a> + <li><a href="ltx-261.html">\location</a> + <li><a href="ltx-262.html">\makebox</a> + <li><a href="ltx-263.html">\maketitle</a> + <li><a href="ltx-264.html">\markboth \markright</a> + <li><a href="ltx-407.html">\mathcal</a> + <li><a href="stackrel.html#mathop">\mathop</a> + <li><a href="ltx-265.html">\mbox</a> + <li><a href="ltx-266.html">\medskip</a> + <li><a href="ltx-268.html">\multicolumn</a> + <li><a href="ltx-269.html">\multiput</a> + <li><a href="ltx-18.html">\newcommand</a> + <li><a href="ltx-271.html">\newcounter</a> + <li><a href="ltx-19.html">\newenvironment</a> + <li><a href="ltx-21.html">\newfont</a> + <li><a href="ltx-87.html">\newlength</a> + <li><a href="ltx-275.html">\newline</a> + <li><a href="ltx-276.html">\newpage</a> + <li><a href="ltx-277.html">\newsavebox</a> + <li><a href="ltx-20.html">\newtheorem</a> + <li><a href="ltx-279.html">\nocite</a> + <li><a href="ltx-280.html">\noindent</a> + <li><a href="ltx-281.html">\nolinebreak</a> + <li><a href="ltx-282.html">\normalsize</a> (default) + <li><a href="ltx-283.html">\nopagebreak</a> + <li><a href="ltx-404.html#not">\not</a> + <li><a href="ltx-284.html">\onecolumn</a> + <li><a href="ltx-97.html">\opening</a> + <li><a href="ltx-286.html">\oval</a> + <li><a href="ltx-287.html">\overbrace</a> + <li><a href="ltx-288.html">\overline</a> + <li><a href="ltx-289.html">\pagebreak</a> + <li><a href="ltx-137.html">\pagenumbering</a> + <li><a href="ltx-291.html">\pageref</a> + <li><a href="ltx-138.html">\pagestyle</a> + <li><a href="ltx-293.html">\par</a> + <li><a href="ltx-294.html">\parbox</a> + <li><a href="ltx-86.html#lencmd">\parindent</a> + <li><a href="parskip.html">\parskip</a> + <li><a href="fragile.html">\protect</a> + <li><a href="ltx-18.html">\providecommand</a> (LaTeX2e) + <li><a href="ltx-296.html">\put</a> + <li><a href="ltx-299.html">\raggedbottom</a> + <li><a href="ltx-300.html">\raggedleft</a> + <li><a href="ltx-301.html">\raggedright</a> + <li><a href="ltx-302.html">\raisebox</a> + <li><a href="ltx-303.html">\ref</a> + <li><a href="ltx-18.html">\renewcommand</a> + <li><a href="ltx-403.html#big">\right</a> + <li><a href="ltx-304.html">\rm</a> + <li><a href="ltx-305.html">\roman</a> + <li><a href="ltx-306.html">\rule</a> + <li><a href="ltx-307.html">\savebox</a> + <li><a href="ltx-307.html">\sbox</a> + <li><a href="ltx-308.html">\sc</a> + <li><a href="ltx-309.html">\scriptsize</a> + <li><a href="ltx-310.html">\setcounter</a> + <li><a href="ltx-88.html">\setlength</a> + <li><a href="ltx-90.html">\settowidth</a> + <li><a href="ltx-313.html">\sf</a> + <li><a href="ltx-314.html">\shortstack</a> + <li><a href="ltx-315.html">\signature</a> + <li><a href="ltx-316.html">\sl</a> + <li><a href="ltx-317.html">\small</a> + <li><a href="ltx-318.html">\smallskip</a> + <li><a href="ltx-319.html">\sqrt</a> + <li><a href="stackrel.html">\stackrel</a> + <li><a href="toc.html">\tableofcontents</a> + <li><a href="ltx-323.html">\telephone</a> + <li><a href="textwidth.html">\textwidth</a> + <li><a href="ltx-86.html#lencmd">\textheight</a> + <li><a href="ltx-324.html">\thanks</a> + <li><a href="ltx-140.html">\thispagestyle</a> + <li><a href="ltx-328.html">\tiny</a> + <li><a href="ltx-329.html">\title</a> + <li><a href="ltx-330.html">\today</a> + <li><a href="ltx-331.html">\tt</a> + <li><a href="ltx-332.html">\twocolumn</a> + <li><a href="ltx-174.html">\typeout</a> + <li><a href="ltx-175.html">\typein</a> + <li><a href="ltx-335.html">\underbrace</a> + <li><a href="ltx-336.html">\underline</a> + <li><a href="unitlength.html">\unitlength</a> + <li><a href="ltx-337.html">\usebox</a> + <li><a href="ltx-338.html">\usecounter</a> + <li><a href="ltx-339.html">\value</a> + <li><a href="ltx-340.html">\vdots</a> + <li><a href="ltx-341.html">\vector</a> + <li><a href="ltx-342.html">\verb</a> + <li><a href="ltx-345.html">\vfill</a> + <li><a href="ltx-346.html">\vline</a> + <li><a href="ltx-403.html#big">\vphantom</a> + <li><a href="ltx-347.html">\vspace</a> +</ul> + + +<h2><a name="env">LaTeX Environments</a></h2> + +<p>LaTeX <a href="ltx-27.html">environments</a> are created by</p> + +<pre> \begin{<b>environment</b>} ... \end{<b>environment</b>}</pre> + +<p><a href="declarations.html">Declarations</a> can be effected by an +environment of the same name.</p> + +<ul> + <li><a href="ltx-420.html">abstract</a> + <li><a href="ltx-202.html">array</a> + <li><a href="ltx-29.html">center</a> + <li><a href="ltx-31.html">description</a> + <li><a href="ltx-421.html">displaymath</a> + <li><a href="ltx-222.html">enumerate</a> + <li><a href="ltx-223.html">eqnarray</a> + <li><a href="ltx-224.html">equation</a> + <li><a href="ltx-225.html">figure</a> + <li><a href="ltx-228.html">flushleft</a> + <li><a href="ltx-229.html">flushright</a> + <li><a href="ltx-250.html">itemize</a> + <li><a href="ltx-260.html">list</a> + <li><a href="ltx-115.html#math">math</a> + <li><a href="ltx-267.html">minipage</a> + <li><a href="ltx-43.html">picture</a> + <li><a href="ltx-297.html">quotation</a> + <li><a href="ltx-298.html">quote</a> + <li><a href="ltx-58.html">tabbing</a> + <li><a href="ltx-67.html">table</a> + <li><a href="ltx-68.html">tabular</a> + <li><a href="ltx-73.html">thebibliography</a> + <li><a href="ltx-77.html">theorem</a> + <li><a href="ltx-78.html">titlepage</a> + <li><a href="trivlist.html">trivlist</a> + <li><a href="ltx-79.html">verbatim</a> + <li><a href="ltx-81.html">verse</a> +</ul> + +<hr> + +<p>Return to the <a href="index.html">Introduction</a></p> + +<hr> + +<address> +Page revised: 1997:05:15, RBS +</address> + +</body> +</html> + diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-20.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-20.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..fcb6b6960d9 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-20.html @@ -0,0 +1,35 @@ +<html> +<head><title>Help On LaTeX \newtheorem</title></head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\newtheorem</font></h1> +<p> + <tt>\newtheorem{env_name}{caption}[within]</tt> + <tt>\newtheorem{env_name}[numbered_like]{caption}</tt> +<p> + This command defines a theorem-like environment. +<ul> +<li><TT>env_name</TT> The name of the environment -- a string of letters. + Must not be the name of an existing environment or counter. +<p> +<li><TT>caption</TT> The text printed at the beginning of the environment, + right before the number. +<p> +<li><TT>within</TT> The name of an already defined counter, usually of a + sectional unit. Provides a means of resetting the new theorem + counter within the sectional unit. +<p> +<li><TT>numbered_like</TT> The name of an already defined theorem-like + environment. +</ul> + + The <tt>\newtheorem</tt> command may have at most one optional argument. + +<hr> +Go back to <a href="ltx-17.html">Definitions</a><br> +Go to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 2 May 1995. +</address> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-200.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-200.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..d49f3203700 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-200.html @@ -0,0 +1,44 @@ +<html> +<head><title>Help On LaTeX \appendix</title></head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\appendix</font></h1> + <tt>\appendix</tt> +<p> + The <tt>\appendix</tt> command changes the way sectional units are numbered. + The <tt>\appendix</tt> command generates no text and does not affect the + numbering of parts. +<p>Thus, if you want your appendix to be set off with a section-like +label you need something like<pre> + <tt>\begin{<a href="ltx-29.html">center</a>} + {<a href="ltx-204.html">\bf</a> APPENDIX} + \end{center}</tt> +</pre> +<hr> +I have found the <tt>\appendix</tt> command to sometimes cause +problems since <em>everything</em> which follows it is treated as part of +the appendix, for example, a list of figures, which I generally +want to place after an appendix is labeled "Appendix: List of Figures". +<p> +One can create a section labeled "APPENDIX" with distinctive numbering +by using the <a href="ltx-141.html"><tt>\section</tt></a> command +with suitably redefined commands for the <a href="ltx-3.html">Counters</a>. +The following example generates a single "Appendix" with equations numbered +A-1, A-2, ... <pre> + <tt><a href="ltx-18.html">\renewcommand</a>{\theequation}{A-\arabic{equation}} + % redefine the command that creates the equation no. + <a href="ltx-310.html">\setcounter</a>{equation}{0} % reset counter + <a href="ltx-141.html">\section*</a>{APPENDIX} % use *-form to suppress numbering</tt> +</pre> +If one had several appendices, appropriate numbering could be obtained by +redefining the <tt>\thesection</tt> command and resetting the section +counter in an analogous manner. +<hr> +See also: <A href="ltx-141.html">Sectioning</A>, + <a href="ltx-3.html">Counters</a><br> +Return to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 14 Jul 1995. +</address> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-201.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-201.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..d64e76faf58 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-201.html @@ -0,0 +1,18 @@ +<html> +<head><title>Help On LaTeX \arabic</title></head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\arabic</font></h1> + + <tt>\arabic{counter}</tt> +<p> + The <tt>\arabic</tt> command causes the current value of <tt>counter</tt> + to be printed in arabic numbers, i.e., 3. +<hr> +See also <A href="ltx-3.html">Counters</A><br> +Go to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 18 May 1995. +</address> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-202.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-202.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..5727ba7bcfd --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-202.html @@ -0,0 +1,68 @@ +<html> +<head><title>Help On LaTeX arrays</title></head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">Arrays</font></h1> +<p> +<p><pre> + \begin{array}[pos]{vvvv} + column 1 entry &: column 2 entry ... & column n entry \\ + ... + ... + ... + \end{array} +</pre><p> + The array environment, like the <a href="ltx-68.html">tabular</a> + environment, produces a <a href="ltx-143.html">box</a> + consisting of a sequence of rows of + vertically aligned columns. It can be used only within the + <a href="ltx-115.html">math environment</a>. +<p> + There is a single mandatory argument describing the number of columns and + the alignment within each of them. + Each of the <tt>v</tt>'s in the argument specifies a column and may be + a <tt>l</tt>, <tt>c</tt>, or <tt>r</tt> indicating that the column should + be flush left, centered, or flush right, respectively. For more + complex options, see the <a href="ltx-68.html">tabular environment</a> + which uses the same format. +<p> + The optional <tt>pos</tt> argument specifies the alignment of the array with + its surrounding environment (recall that LaTeX treats boxes as one, + albeit large letter). The options are +<ul> +<li><tt>t</tt> - align on top row +<li><tt>b</tt> - align on bottom row +</ul> +The default is to align on the center of the array. +<p> + Column entries must be separated by an <tt>&</tt>. Column entries + may include other LaTeX commands, even other arrays. + Each row of the array must be terminated with + the string <a href="ltx-181.html"><tt>\\</tt></a>. + Note that there is no <tt>&</tt> after the last + item in a row and no <tt>\\</tt> after the last row. (An exception is if + an <tt><a href="ltx-239.html">\hline</a></tt> is used to place a line + at the bottom; it follows a <tt>\\</tt>.) +<p> +Each item in the array is treated as if it were surrounded by braces. Thus, +a <a href="declarations.html">declaration</a> within an array item is +local to that item, i.e., it is ended by an <tt>&</tt> or <tt>\\</tt>. +<p> +Horizontal and vertical lines in the array are produced with +<ul> +<li><a href="ltx-214.html"><tt>\cline</tt></a> +<li><a href="ltx-239.html"><tt>\hline</tt></a> +<li><a href="ltx-346.html"><tt>\vline</tt></a> +</ul> +<hr> +See also +<ul> + <li><a href="ltx-68.html">tabular environment</a><br> + <li><a href="ltx-115.html">math environment</a> +</ul> +Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 31 May 1995. +</address> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-203.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-203.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..5c5e6604c0a --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-203.html @@ -0,0 +1,34 @@ +<html> +<head><title>Help On LaTeX \author</title></head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\author</font></h1> +<p> + <tt>\author{names}</tt> +<p> + The <tt>\author</tt> command declares the author(s), where names is a list of + authors separated by <tt>\and</tt> commands. Use + <a href="ltx-181.html"><tt>\\</tt></a> + to separate lines within a + single author's entry -- for example, to give the author's institution + or address. +<p> + NOTE: The milstd and book-form styles have re-defined the + <A href="ltx-263.html"><tt>\maketitle</tt></a> + command. The + <a href="ltx-329.html"><tt>\title</tt></a> + declaration is the only command that has any meaning. +<p> + A footnote for an author is produced with the + <a href="ltx-324.html"><tt>\thanks</tt></a> command. + +<hr> +See also <A href="ltx-131.html">Page Styles</A><br> +See also <A href="ltx-263.html"><tt>\maketitle</tt></A>, + <a href="ltx-329.html"><tt>\title</tt></a><br> +Go to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 16 Nov 1995. +</address> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-204.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-204.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..44ed7387d11 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-204.html @@ -0,0 +1,20 @@ +<html> +<head><title>Help On LaTeX \bf</title></head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\bf</font></h1> +<p> + Boldface typeface. +<p> +This is version 2.09; see also + <a href="fonts2e.html">LaTeX2e font selection</a><br> +<hr> +See also <A href="ltx-176.html">Typefaces</A>, + <A href="ltx-177.html">Styles</A><br> +See also <a href="boldmath.html"><tt>\boldmath</tt></a><br> +Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 16 May 1995. +</address> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-205.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-205.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..d290d2c7cb7 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-205.html @@ -0,0 +1,42 @@ +<html> +<head><title>Help On LaTeX \bibitem</title></head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\bibitem</font></h1> +<p> + <tt>\bibitem[label]{cite_key}</tt> +<p> + + The <tt>\bibitem</tt> command generates an entry labeled by <tt>label</tt>. + If the <tt>label</tt> + argument is missing, a number is generated as the label, using + the <tt>enumiv</tt> + <a href="ltx-3.html">counter</a>. + The <tt>cite_key</tt> is a mnemonic consisting of any sequence of letters, + numbers, and punctuation symbols not containing a comma. +<p> + <tt>\bibitem</tt> and <a href="ltx-211.html"><tt>\cite</tt></a> are used + together much as <a href="ltx-252.html"><tt>\label</tt></a> and + <a href="ltx-303.html"><tt>\ref</tt></a> to produce a correspondence + between items in the Reference or Bibliography + (<a href="ltx-73.html"><tt>thebibliography</tt></a> environment). +<p> + This command writes + an entry on the aux file containing <tt>cite_key</tt> and the item's + <tt>label</tt>. + When this aux file is read by the + <a href="ltx-169.html"><tt>\begin{document}</tt></a> command, the item's + <tt>label</tt> is associated with <tt>cite_key</tt>, + causing the reference to <tt>cite_key</tt> by a + <a href="ltx-211.html"><tt>\cite</tt></a> command to produce the + associated <tt>label</tt>. +<hr> +See also <A href="ltx-27.html">Environments</A><br> +See also <A href="ltx-73.html"><tt>thebibliography</tt></A>, + <a href="ltx-211.html"><tt>\cite</tt></a><br> +Return to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 17 May 1995. +</address> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-206.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-206.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..6649b51b387 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-206.html @@ -0,0 +1,17 @@ +<html> +<head><title>Help On LaTeX \bigskip</title></head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\bigskip</font></h1> +<p> + The <tt>\bigskip</tt> command is equivalent to + <tt>\vspace{\bigskipamount}</tt> where + <tt>\bigskipamount</tt> is determined by the document style. +<hr> +See also: <A href="ltx-143.html">Spaces and Boxes</A><br> +Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 10 May 1995. +</address> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-207.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-207.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..287ce7da3fc --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-207.html @@ -0,0 +1,26 @@ +<html> +<head><title>Help On LaTeX \cdots</title></head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\cdots</font></h1> +<p> + The <tt>\cdots</tt> command produces a horizontal ellipsis where the dots are + raised to the center of the line.<br> + Can be used only in math mode. +<p> +See also: +<ul> +<li><A href="ltx-218.html">\ddots</A> +<li><A href="ltx-256.html">\ldots</A> +<li><A href="ltx-340.html">\vdots</A> +<p> +<li><A href="ltx-115.html">Math Formulas</A>, +<li><A href="ltx-119.html">Math Miscellany</A>. +</ul> +<p> +Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 25 April 1995. +</address> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-21.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-21.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..9bfe0b716d4 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-21.html @@ -0,0 +1,20 @@ +<html> +<head><title>Help On LaTeX \newfont</title></head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\newfont</font></h1> +<p> + <tt>\newfont{cmd}{font_name}</tt> +<p> + + Defines the command name <tt>cmd</tt>, which must not be currently defined, to + be a declaration that selects the font named <tt>font_name</tt> to be the + current font. +<hr> +Go back to <a href="ltx-17.html">Definitions</a><br> +Go to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 2 May 1995. +</address> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-210.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-210.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..554e7b8619d --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-210.html @@ -0,0 +1,18 @@ +<html> +<head><title>Help On LaTeX \circle</title></head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\circle</font></h1> + <tt>\circle[*]{diameter}</tt> +<p> + The <tt>\circle</tt> command produces a circle of the specified diameter. If + the *-form of the command is used, LaTeX draws a solid circle. +<hr> +See also: <A href="ltx-27.html">Environments</A>, + <A href="ltx-43.html">picture</A><br> +Return to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 28 Jun 1995. +</address> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-211.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-211.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..a9fd440a2af --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-211.html @@ -0,0 +1,32 @@ +<html> +<head><title>Help On LaTeX \cite</title></head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\cite</font></h1> +<p> + <tt>\cite[text]{key_list}</tt> +<p> + + The <tt>key_list</tt> argument is a list of citation keys. This command + generates an in-text citation to the references associated with the + keys in <tt>key_list</tt> by entries on the aux file read by the + <a href="ltx-169.html"><tt>\begin{document}</tt></a> command. +<p> + <a href="ltx-205.html"><tt>\bibitem</tt></a> and <tt>\cite</tt> are used + together much as <a href="ltx-252.html"><tt>\label</tt></a> and + <a href="ltx-303.html"><tt>\ref</tt></a> to produce a correspondence + between items in the Reference or Bibliography + (<a href="ltx-73.html"><tt>thebibliography</tt></a> environment). +<p> +The <tt>\cite</tt> command is <a href="fragile.html">fragile</a>. +<hr> + See also <a href="ltx-27.html">Environments</a>, + <A href="ltx-13.html">Cross References</A><br> + See also <a href="ltx-73.html"><tt>thebibliography</tt></a>, + <a href="ltx-205.html"><tt>\bibitem</tt></a><br> + Return to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 4 Jul 1995. +</address> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-212.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-212.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..8116dbf6023 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-212.html @@ -0,0 +1,18 @@ +<html> +<head><title>Help On LaTeX \cleardoublepage</title></head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\cleardoublepage</font></h1> +<p> + The <tt>\cleardoublepage</tt> command ends the current page and causes all + figures and tables that have so far appeared in the input to be + printed. In a two-sided printing style, it also makes the next page a + right-hand (odd-numbered) page, producing a blank page if necessary. +<hr> +See also <A href="ltx-99.html">Line and Page Breaking</A><br> +Go to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 5 May 1995. +</address> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-213.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-213.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..8cee5c21f9d --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-213.html @@ -0,0 +1,16 @@ +<html> +<head><title>Help On LaTeX \clearpage</title></head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\clearpage</font></h1> +<p> + The <tt>\clearpage</tt> command ends the current page and causes all figures + and tables that have so far appeared in the input to be printed. +<hr> +See also <A href="ltx-99.html">Line and Page Breaking</A><br> +Go to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 5 May 1995. +</address> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-214.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-214.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..41932ca6a02 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-214.html @@ -0,0 +1,28 @@ +<html> +<head><title>Help On LaTeX \cline</title></head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\cline</font></h1> + <tt>\cline{i-j}</tt> +<p> + The <tt>\cline</tt> command draws horizontal lines across the columns + specified, beginning in column i and ending in column j, which are + identified in the mandatory argument. +<p> +It is used in the <A href="ltx-68.html">tabular</A> and +<a href="ltx-202.html">array</a> environment. +<p> + Two (or more) successive <tt>\cline</tt> commands draw lines in the same + vertical position. Typically, <tt>\cline</tt> commands are placed after a + <a href="ltx-181.html"><tt>\\</tt></a> (line breadk) command so that + they separate items on two lines; they do + not, however, need a line break command afterwards. +<hr> +See also <A href="ltx-68.html">tabular</A> and + <a href="ltx-202.html">array</a> environments<br> +Return to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 10 Oct 1995. +</address> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-216.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-216.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..d0b9abfc97b --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-216.html @@ -0,0 +1,22 @@ +<html> +<head><title>Help On LaTeX \dashbox</title> +</head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\dashbox</font></h1> + <tt>\dashbox{dash length}(width,height)[pos]{ ... }</tt> +<p> + Used only in the <a href="ltx-43.html">picture environement</a>, + the <tt>\dashbox</tt> is like <a href="ltx-237.html"><tt>\framebox</tt></a> + but has an extra argument which specifies the width of each + dash. A dashed box looks best when the width and height are multiples + of the dash length. +<hr> +See also <A href="ltx-43.html">Picture Environment</A><br> +See also <a href="ltx-237.html"><tt>\framebox</tt></a><br> +Return to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 5 Dec 1995. +</address> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-217.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-217.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..0878ebe1c95 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-217.html @@ -0,0 +1,22 @@ +<html> +<head><title>Help On LaTeX \date</title> +</head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\date</font></h1> +<p> + <tt>\date{text}</tt> +<p> + The <tt>\date</tt> command declares <tt>text</tt> + to be the document's date. With no + <tt>\date</tt> command, the current date is used. +<hr> +See also <A href="ltx-131.html">Page Styles</A>, + <A href="ltx-263.html"><tt>\maketitle</tt></A><br> +See also <a href="ltx-330.html"><tt>\today</tt></a><br> +Return to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 17 May 1995. +</address> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-218.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-218.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..3b4394dae9a --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-218.html @@ -0,0 +1,25 @@ +<html> +<head><title>Help On LaTeX \ddots</title> +</head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\ddots</font></h1> +<p> + The <tt>\ddots</tt> command produces a diagonal ellipsis.<br> + Can be used only in math mode. +<p> +See also: +<ul> +<li><A href="ltx-207.html">\cdots</A> +<li><A href="ltx-256.html">\ldots</A> +<li><A href="ltx-340.html">\vdots</A> +<p> +<li><A href="ltx-115.html">Math Formulas</A>, +<li><A href="ltx-119.html">Math Miscellany</A>. +</ul> +Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 25 April 1995. +</address> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-22.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-22.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..cba6bef116a --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-22.html @@ -0,0 +1,46 @@ +<html> +<head><title>Help On LaTeX Document Styles</title></head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">Document Styles</font></h1> +<p> + Valid LaTeX document styles include: + <ul> + <li><I>article</I> + <li><I>report</I> + <li><I>letter</I> + <li><I>book</I> + </ul> + They are selected with the following command: +<p> + <tt>\documentstyle[options]{style}</tt> +<p> + The options for the different styles are: +<ol> + <li>article: 11pt, 12pt, twoside, twocolumn, draft, fleqn, leqno, + acm + <li>report: 11pt, 12pt, twoside, twocolumn, draft, fleqn, leqno, acm + <li>letter: 11pt, 12pt, fleqn, leqno, acm + <li>book: 11pt, 12pt, twoside,twocolumn, draft, fleqn, leqno +</ol> + If you specify more than one option, they must be separated by a + comma. +<hr> +Related topics: +<ul> +<li><A href="ltx-227.html">\flushbottom</A> +<li><A href="ltx-284.html">\onecolumn</A> +<li><A href="ltx-299.html">\raggedbottom</A> +<li><A href="ltx-332.html">\twocolumn</A> +</ul> +See also <a href="ltx-169.html">starting and ending</a><br> +The <tt>\documentstyle</tt> +command has been changed in <a href="versions.html">LaTeX2e</a><br> +<p> +Go to <A href="ltx-177.html">Typeface Styles</A><br> +Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 7 Jul 1995. +</address> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-220.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-220.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..7f3e2e56643 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-220.html @@ -0,0 +1,17 @@ +<html> +<head><title>Help On LaTeX \dotfill</title></head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\dotfill</font></h1> +<p> + The <tt>\dotfill</tt> command produces a + <a href="ltx-86.html#rubber">rubber length</a> that produces dots + instead of just spaces. +<hr> +See <a href="ltx-143.html">Spaces and Boxes</a><br> +Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 23 Oct 1995. +</address> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-221.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-221.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..47de00fca4c --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-221.html @@ -0,0 +1,19 @@ +<html> +<head><title>Help On LaTeX \em</title></head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\em</font></h1> +<p> + Emphasis (toggles between <tt>\it</tt> and <tt>\rm</tt>). +<p> +This is version 2.09; see also + <a href="fonts2e.html">LaTeX2e font selection</a>, + <a href="emph.html"><tt>\emph</tt></a> +<hr> +See also <A href="ltx-176.html">Typefaces</A>, + <A href="ltx-177.html">Styles</A><br> +See also <a href="boldmath.html"><tt>\boldmath</tt></a><br> +Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 16 May 1995. +</address></body></html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-222.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-222.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..59eb551e8b6 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-222.html @@ -0,0 +1,52 @@ +<html> +<head><title>Help On LaTeX enumerate</title></head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">enumerate</font></h1> +<p> +<p><pre> + \begin{enumerate} + \item First item + \item Second item + .... + \end{enumerate} +</pre> +<p> + The enumerate environment produces a numbered list. Enumerations can + be nested within one another, up to four levels deep. They can also + be nested within other paragraph-making environments. +<p> +There must be at least one <tt>\item</tt> command within the environment. +<p> + Each item of an enumerated list begins with an + <a href="item.html"><tt>\item</tt></a> command. The optional <tt>label</tt> + argument of the <tt>\item</tt> command, if given, suppresses incrementing + the <a href="ltx-3.html">counter</a>. If not given the default labels are + taken from the counters, <tt>enumi, enumii, enumiii, enumiv</tt> for the + four allowed levels of nesting, respectively. +<p> +<a name="example">The</a> numbering style for the enumeration is determined by +the commands, <tt>\labelenumi</tt>, <tt>\labelenumii</tt>, etc., for +the nested levels. These may be redefined with the +<a href="ltx-18.html"><tt>\renewcommand</tt></a> command. +<p> +For example, to use upper case letters for the first level and lower +case letters for the second level of enumeration: +<pre> + <tt>\renewcommand{\labelenumi}{<a href="ltx-199.html">\Alph</a>{enumi}} + \renewcommand{\labelenumii}{<a href="ltx-199.html">\alph</a>{enumii}}</tt> +</pre> +<hr> + +See also <A href="ltx-27.html">Environments</A>, + <a href="lists.html">Lists</a>, + <a href="ltx-3.html">Counters</a><br> +See also <a href="item.html"><tt>\item</tt></a><br> +Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a> +<hr> +<address> +Thanks to Robert Biddle, Robert.Biddle@Comp.VUW.AC.NZ, for info on +the <tt>\labelenumi</tt> commands.<br> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 10 Oct 1995. +</address> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-223.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-223.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..7d5200b374a --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-223.html @@ -0,0 +1,50 @@ +<html> +<head><title>Help On LaTeX eqnarray</title></head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">eqnarray</font></h1> +<p> +<p><pre> + <tt>\begin{eqnarray[*]} + var_1 & rel_1 & eq1 \\ + var_2 & rel_2 & eq2 \\ + .... + \end{eqnarray[*]}</tt> +</pre> + + The eqnarray environment is typically used to display a sequence of equations + or inequalities; it may also be used to manage spacing for long equations. + The <a href="lefteqn.html"><tt>\lefteqn</tt></a> command is useful in + this environment for splitting long equations over several lines. +<p> + It is very much like a three-column + <a href="ltx-202.html">array environment</a>, with position argument <tt>rcl</tt>, + i.e., the columns are justified right, center, and left, respectively. + (However, <a href="ltx-268.html"><tt>\multicolumn</tt></a> may not be used.) +<p> + Consecutive rows are separated by <a href="ltx-181.html"><tt>\\</tt></a> + commands and consecutive items within a + row separated by an <tt>&</tt>. Any item may be empty, i.e., no text. +<p> + A separate equation number is placed on every + line unless that line has a <tt>\nonumber</tt> command. + The optional <tt>eqnarray*</tt> form does not generate any equation numbers. +<p> + A <a href="ltx-252.html"><tt>\label</tt></a> command anywhere within a + row generates a reference to that row's number. +<hr> +Related topics +<ul> +<li><A href="ltx-27.html">Environments</A> +<li><a href="ltx-130.html">LaTeX Modes</a> +<li><a href="ltx-202.html">Array Environment</a> +<li><a href="ltx-224.html">Equation Environment</a> +<li><a href="ltx-421.html">Displaymath Environment</a> +<li><a href="ltx-115.html">Math Formulas</a> +</ul> +Return to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 26 Jun 1995. +</address> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-224.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-224.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..c007e0430da --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-224.html @@ -0,0 +1,35 @@ +<html> +<head><title>Help On LaTeX equation</title></head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">equation</font></h1> +<pre> + \begin{equation} + math formula + \label{eqno1} + \end{equation} +</pre> + + The equation environment centers your equation on the page and places + the equation number in the right margin. +<p> + The <a href="ltx-252.html"><tt>\label</tt></a> command is required + only if you want to use a <a href="ltx-303.html"><tt>\ref</tt></a> + command to refer to the number assigned to this equation. +<p> +The <a href="ltx-421.html">Display Math</a> environment gives the +same effect without the equation number. +<hr> +Related topics +<ul> +<li><A href="ltx-27.html">Environments</A> +<li><a href="ltx-130.html">LaTeX Modes</a> +<li><a href="ltx-223.html">Eqnarray Environment</a> +<li><a href="ltx-115.html">Math Formulas</a> +</ul> +Return to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 31 May 1995. +</address> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-225.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-225.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..e7b032ab3ba --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-225.html @@ -0,0 +1,45 @@ +<html> +<head><title>Help On LaTeX figure</title></head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">figure</font></h1> +<p> +<p><pre> + <tt>\begin{figure}[placement] + + body of the figure + + <a href="caption.html">\caption</a>{figure title} + \end{figure}</tt> +</pre> + + Figures are objects that are not part of the normal text, and are + usually "floated" to a convenient place, like the top of a page. + Figures will not be split between two pages. +<p> + The optional argument [placement] determines where LaTeX will try to + place your figure. There are four places where LaTeX can possibly put + a float: +<ul> +<li><TT>h</TT> Here - at the position in the text where the figure + environment appears. +<li><TT>t</TT> Top - at the top of a text page. +<li><TT>b</TT> Bottom - at the bottom of a text page. +<li><TT>p</TT> Page of floats - on a separate float page, which is a page + containing no text, only floats. +</ul> + The standard report and article styles use the default placement tbp. +<p> + The body of the figure is made up of whatever text, LaTeX commands, + etc., you wish. The + <a href="caption.html"><tt>\caption</tt></a> + command allows you to title your figure. +<hr> +See also <A href="ltx-27.html">Environments</A>, + <a href="ltx-43.html">Picture</a><br> +Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 12 May 1995. +</address> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-226.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-226.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..3becd1a50ff --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-226.html @@ -0,0 +1,26 @@ +<html> +<head><title>Help On LaTeX \fbox</title> +</head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\fbox</font></h1> +<p> + <tt>\fbox{text}</tt> +<p> + + The <tt>\fbox</tt> command is exactly the same as the + <a href="ltx-265.html"><tt>\mbox</tt></a> command, except + that it puts a rectangular frame around the outside of the box + that it creates. +<p> + The <tt>\fbox</tt> command is <a href="fragile.html">robust</a>. +<hr> +See <tt><a href="ltx-237.html">\framebox</a></tt>, + <tt><a href="ltx-265.html">\mbox</a></tt><br> +See also <a href="ltx-143.html">Spaces and Boxes</a><br> +Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 8 Aug 1995. +</address> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-227.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-227.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..9641d7baa84 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-227.html @@ -0,0 +1,17 @@ +<html> +<head><title>Help On LaTeX \flushbottom</title></head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\flushbottom</font></h1> + The <tt>\flushbottom</tt> declaration makes all text pages the same height, + adding extra vertical space when necessary to fill out the page. + +<hr> +See also <A href="ltx-22.html">Document Styles</a><br> +See also <a href="ltx-299.html"><tt>\raggedbottom</tt></a><br> +Return to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 28 Jun 1995. +</address> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-228.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-228.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..72224f71389 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-228.html @@ -0,0 +1,29 @@ +<html> +<head><title>Help On LaTeX flushleft</title></head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">flushleft</font></h1> +<p> +<p><pre> + \begin{flushleft} + Text on line 1 \\ + Text on line 2 \\ + .... + .... + \end{flushleft} +</pre> + The flushleft environment allows you to create a paragraph consisting + of lines that are flushed left to the left-hand margin. Each line + must be terminated with a + <a href="ltx-181.html"><tt>\\</tt></a>. +<hr> +See also <A href="ltx-27.html">Environments</A>, + <a href="ltx-29.html">Center</a>, <a href="ltx-229.html">Flushright</a><br> +See also <a href="ltx-301.html"><tt>\raggedright</tt></a><br> +Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 5 Jun 1995. +</address> +</body> +</html> + diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-229.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-229.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..bd65c969c83 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-229.html @@ -0,0 +1,27 @@ +<html> +<head><title>Help On LaTeX flushright</title> +</head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">flushright</font></h1> + +<p><pre> + \begin{flushright} + Text on line 1 \\ + Text on line 2 \\ + ... + ... + \end{flushright} +</pre> + The flushright environment allows you to create a paragraph consisting + of lines that are flushed right to the right-hand margin. Each line + must be terminated with a <tt><a href="ltx-181.html">\\</a></tt>. +<hr> +See also <A href="ltx-27.html">Environments</A>, + <a href="ltx-29.html">Center</a>, <a href="ltx-228.html">Flushleft</a><br> +See also <a href="ltx-300.html"><tt>\raggedleft</tt></a><br> +Return to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 5 Jun 1995. +</address> +</body></html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-230.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-230.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..03784b5af2b --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-230.html @@ -0,0 +1,26 @@ +<html> +<head><title>Help On LaTeX \fnsymbol</title></head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\fnsymbol</font></h1> + + <tt>\fnsymbol{counter}</tt> +<p> + The <tt>\fnsymbol</tt> command causes the current value of <tt>counter</tt> + to be printed in + a specific sequence of nine symbols that can be used for numbering + footnotes. (The sequence is asterisk, dagger, double dagger, section + mark, paragraph mark, double vertical lines, double asterisks, double + daggers, double double daggers.) +<p> + The value of <tt>counter</tt> must be less between 1 and 9. +<p> + Can be used <strong>only</strong> in math mode. +<hr> +See also <A href="ltx-3.html">Counters</A><br> +Go to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 03 Nov 1995. +</address> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-231.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-231.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..a27bb00fc67 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-231.html @@ -0,0 +1,31 @@ +<html> +<head><title>Help On LaTeX \footnote</title></head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\footnote</font></h1> + <tt>\footnote[num]{text}</tt> + The <tt>\footnote</tt> command places a numbered footnote at the bottom + of the current page containing the contents of the argument, <tt>text</tt>. + The optional argument, <tt>num</tt>, is used to change + the default footnote number. This command can only be used in outer + paragraph mode. +<p> + If <tt>num</tt> is not specified, the footnote + <a href="ltx-3.html">counter</a> is incremented and its value is used. +<p> + Note that <tt>num</tt> is specified as a positive integer even if + the footnote <a href="ltx-3.html">counter</a> has been set to use letters + or roman numerals. +<p> +This command is <a href="fragile.html">fragile.</a> +<hr> +See also: <A href="ltx-82.html">Footnotes</A>, + <a href="ltx-3.html">Counters</a><br> +See also <a href="ltx-232.html"><tt>\footnotemark</tt></a> and + <a href="ltx-234.html"><tt>\footnotetext</tt></a><br> +Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: RBS, 5 February 1997. +</address> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-232.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-232.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..80680af1eb1 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-232.html @@ -0,0 +1,28 @@ +<html> +<head><title>Help On LaTeX \footnotemark</title> +</head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\footnotemark</font></h1> +<tt>\footnotemark[num]</tt> +<p> + The <tt>\footnotemark[num]</tt> command puts the footnote number in the text. + It is used in conjunction with <a href="ltx-234.html"><tt>\footnotetext</tt></a> + to produce footnotes where <a href="ltx-231.html"><tt>\footnote</tt></a> + cannot be used +<p> + If <tt>num</tt> is not given the footnote <a href="ltx-3.html">counter</a> + is incremented and used. +<p> +This command is <a href="fragile.html">fragile.</a> +<hr> +See also <A href="ltx-82.html">Footnotes</A>, +<a href="ltx-3.html">Counters</a><br> +See also <tt><A href="ltx-231.html">\footnote</A></tt> + <tt><A href="ltx-234.html">\footnotetext</A></tt><br> +Return to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 29 Jun 1995. +</address> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-233.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-233.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..b2b769e4ab6 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-233.html @@ -0,0 +1,16 @@ +<html> +<head><title>Help On LaTeX \footnotesize</title></head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\footnotesize</font></h1> + Third smallest of 10 typefaces available. This is the default size + for footnotes. +<hr> +See also <A href="ltx-176.html">Typefaces</A>, + <A href="ltx-178.html">Sizes</A><br> +Return to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 28 Jun 1995. +</address> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-234.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-234.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..8a5557b3904 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-234.html @@ -0,0 +1,31 @@ +<html> +<head><title>Help On LaTeX \footnotetext</title></head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\footnotetext</font></h1> + <tt>\footnotetext[num]{text}</tt> +<p> + + The <tt>\footnotetext</tt> command is used in conjunction with the + <a href="ltx-232.html"><tt>\footnotemark</tt></a> command and + places the <tt>text</tt> in the argument at the bottom + of the page. This command can come anywhere after the + <a href="ltx-232.html"><tt>\footnotemark</tt></a> + command. +<p> + The optional argument, number, is used to change the default footnote + number. + Otherwise, the footnote counter is not changed. +<p> +This command is <a href="fragile.html">fragile.</a> +<hr> +See also: <A href="ltx-82.html">Footnotes</A>, + <a href="ltx-3.html">Counters</a><br> +See also <tt><A href="ltx-231.html">\footnote</A></tt>, + <tt><A href="ltx-232.html">\footnotemark</A></tt><br> +Return to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 29 Jun 1995. +</address> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-235.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-235.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..660f12331fb --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-235.html @@ -0,0 +1,21 @@ +<html> +<head><title>Help On LaTeX \frac</title></head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\frac</font></h1> + <tt>\frac{num}{den}</tt> +<p> + + The <tt>\frac</tt> command produces the fraction num divided by den, + placing the numerator over a horizontal line (solidus) and the + denominator below. + +<hr> +See also: <A href="ltx-115.html">Math Formulas</A>, + <A href="ltx-119.html">Math Miscellany</A><br> +Return to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 15 May 1995. +</address> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-236.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-236.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..e383c0fa223 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-236.html @@ -0,0 +1,21 @@ +<html> +<head><title>Help On LaTeX \frame</title> +</head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\frame</font></h1> +<pre>\frame{ ... } +</pre> + + The <tt>\frame</tt> command puts a rectangular frame around the object + specified in the argument. The reference point is the bottom left + corner of the frame. No extra space is put between the frame and the + object. +<hr> +See also <A href="ltx-43.html">Picture Environment</A><br> +Return to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 27 Sep 1995. +</address> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-237.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-237.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..4ccb4121dab --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-237.html @@ -0,0 +1,37 @@ +<html> +<head><title>Help On LaTeX \framebox</title></head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\framebox</font></h1> +<h2>Normal use</h2> + <tt>\framebox[width][position]{text}</tt> +<p> + The <tt>\framebox</tt> command is exactly the same as the + <a href="ltx-262.html"><tt>\makebox</tt></a> command, + except that it puts a frame around the outside of the box that it + creates. +<p> + The framebox command produces a rule of thickness <tt>\fboxrule,</tt> and + leaves a space <tt>\fboxsep</tt> between the rule and the contents of the box. +<p> + The <tt>\framebox</tt> command is <a href="fragile.html">fragile</a>. + +<h2>In picture environment</h2> +<tt>\framebox(width,height)[position]{...}</tt> +<p> + The <tt>\framebox</tt> command is exactly the same as the + <a href="ltx-262.html"><tt>\makebox</tt></a> command, + except that it puts a frame around the outside of the box that it + creates. +<hr> + See also <tt><a href="ltx-226.html">\fbox</a></tt>, + <tt><a href="ltx-262.html">\makebox</a></tt>, + <tt><a href="ltx-216.html">\dashbox</a></tt><br> + See also <A href="ltx-143.html">Spaces and Boxes</A>, + <A href="ltx-43.html">Picture Environment</A>.<br> + Return to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>. +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 5 Dec 1995. +</address> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-238.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-238.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..d2b610d8a4d --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-238.html @@ -0,0 +1,18 @@ +<html> +<head><title>Help On LaTeX \hfill</title></head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\hfill</font></h1> +<p> + The <tt>\hfill</tt> fill command produces a + <a href="ltx-86.html#rubber">rubber length</a> which can stretch or + shrink horizontally. It will be filled with spaces. It is equivalent + to <tt><a href="ltx-241.html">\hspace</a>\fill</tt>. +<hr> +See <a href="ltx-143.html">Spaces and Boxes</a><br> +Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 23 Oct 1995. +</address> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-239.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-239.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..0aa58a30d9b --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-239.html @@ -0,0 +1,27 @@ +<html> +<head><title>Help On LaTeX \hline</title></head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\hline</font></h1> + The <tt>\hline</tt> command will draw a horizontal line the width of the table. + It's most commonly used to draw a line at the top, bottom, and between + the rows of the table. +<p> + Two successive <tt>\hline</tt> commands leave a space between the + lines; this space does <strong>not</strong> contain the vertical lines + specified by <tt>|</tt> characters in the <tt>col</tt> argument of the + <a href="ltx-68.html"><tt>\begin{tabular}{col}</tt></a> command. +<p> + To place a line at the bottom of a table, the <tt>\hline</tt> command + must follow a <a href="ltx-181.html"><tt>\\</tt></a> (line break) command + after the last table entry. This final line break command should be + present <strong>only</strong> in this circumstance. +<hr> +See also <a href="ltx-202.html">array</a>, +<A href="ltx-68.html">tabular</A>.<br> +Return to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 22 Jun 1995. +</address> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-240.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-240.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..9211fcf1f59 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-240.html @@ -0,0 +1,16 @@ +<html> +<head><title>Help On LaTeX \hrulefill</title></head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\hrulefill</font></h1> +<p> + The <tt>\hrulefill</tt> fill command produces a + <a href="ltx-86.html#rubber">rubber length</a> which can stretch + or shrink horizontally. It will be filled with a horizontal rule. +<hr> +See <a href="ltx-143.html">Spaces and Boxes</a><br> +Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 23 Oct 1995. +</address> +</body></html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-241.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-241.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..bbf4f38e56c --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-241.html @@ -0,0 +1,27 @@ +<html> +<head><title>Help On LaTeX \hspace</title></head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\hspace</font></h1> +<p> + <tt>\hspace[*]{len}</tt> +<p> + + The <tt>\hspace</tt> command adds horizontal space. The length of the space + <tt>len</tt> + can be expressed in any terms that LaTeX understands, i.e., points, + inches, etc. You can add negative as well as positive space with an + <tt>\hspace</tt> command. Adding negative space is like backspacing. +<p> + + LaTeX removes horizontal space that comes at the end of a line. If + you don't want LaTeX to remove this space, include the optional * + argument. Then the space is never removed. +<hr> +See <a href="ltx-143.html">Spaces and Boxes</a>, + <a href="ltx-86.html">Lengths</a><br> +Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 10 May 1995. +</address> +</body></html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-242.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-242.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..8f78e1596da --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-242.html @@ -0,0 +1,15 @@ +<html> +<head><title>Help On LaTeX \huge</title></head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\huge</font></h1> + Second largest of 10 typefaces available. +<hr> +See also <A href="ltx-176.html">Typefaces</A>, + <A href="ltx-178.html">Sizes</A><br> +Return to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 28 Jun 1995. +</address> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-243.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-243.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..2b38b714c47 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-243.html @@ -0,0 +1,14 @@ +<html> +<head><title>Help On LaTeX \Huge (capital "h")</title></head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\Huge (capital "h")</font></h1> + Largest of 10 typefaces available. All fonts may not be available in + this size. +<hr> +See also <A href="ltx-176.html">Typefaces</A>, + <A href="ltx-178.html">Sizes</A><br> +Return to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 28 Jun 1995. +</address></body></html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-244.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-244.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..37e02cc1172 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-244.html @@ -0,0 +1,30 @@ +<html> +<head><title>Help On LaTeX \hyphenation</title></head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\hyphenation</font></h1> +<p> + <tt>\hyphenation{words}</tt> +<p> + The <tt>\hyphenation</tt> command declares allowed hyphenation points, where + words is a list of words, separated by spaces, in which each + hyphenation point is indicated by a - character. For example +<pre> + <tt>\hyphenation{fortran,er-go-no-mic}</tt></pre> +indicates that "fortran" cannot be hyphenated and indicates allowed +hyphenation points for "ergonomic". +<p> +This argument to this command should contain words composed only of normal +letters. To suggest hyphenation points for strings containing nonletters +or <a href="ltx-401.html">accented letters</a>, use +the <a href="ltx-182.html"><tt>\-</tt></a> command in the input text. +<p> +This command is normally given in the <a href="input.html#structure">preamble</a>. +<hr> +See also <A href="ltx-99.html">Line and Page Breaking</A><br> +Go to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 5 Jun 1995. +</address> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-245.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-245.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..ee636285985 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-245.html @@ -0,0 +1,31 @@ +<html> +<head><title>Help On LaTeX \include</title></head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\include</font></h1> + <tt>\include{file}</tt> +<p> + The <tt>\include</tt> command is used in conjunction with the + <tt><a href="ltx-246.html">\includeonly</a></tt> + command for selective inclusion of files. The <tt>file</tt> argument is the + first name of a file, denoting <tt>file.tex</tt>. If the file is also + in the file list of the <tt>\includeonly</tt> command or if there is no + <tt>\includeonly</tt> command, the <tt>\include</tt> command is equivalent to +<Pre> + <tt><a href="ltx-213.html">\clearpage</a> \input{file} <a href="ltx-213.html">\clearpage</a></tt> +</Pre> + except that if the file <tt>file.tex</tt> does not exist, then a warning + message rather than an error is produced. If the file is not in the + file list, the <tt>\include</tt> command is equivalent to <tt>\clearpage</tt>. +<p> + The <tt>\include</tt> command may not appear in the preamble or in a file read + by another <tt>\include</tt> command. +<hr> +See also <A href="ltx-165.html">Splitting the Input</A><br> +See also <a href="ltx-248.html"><tt>\input</tt></a><br> +Return to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 30 Oct 1995. +</address> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-246.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-246.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..08951cd0f9b --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-246.html @@ -0,0 +1,18 @@ +<html> +<head><title>Help On LaTeX \includeonly</title></head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\includeonly</font></h1> + <tt>\includeonly{file_list}</tt> +<p> + The <tt>\includeonly</tt> command controls which files will be read in by an + <a href="ltx-245.html"><tt>\include</tt></a> command. + It can only appear in the preamble. +<hr> +See also: <A href="ltx-165.html">Splitting the Input</A><br> +Return to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 28 Jun 1995. +</address> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-247.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-247.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..dc52f57e073 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-247.html @@ -0,0 +1,19 @@ +<html> +<head><title>Help On LaTeX \indent</title></head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\indent</font></h1> + This produces a horizontal space whose width equals the width of the + paragraph indentation + (<a href="ltx-86.html#lencmd"><tt>\parindent</tt></a>). + It is used to add paragraph indentation where + it would otherwise be suppressed. +<hr> +See also <a href="ltx-280.html"><tt>\noindent</tt></a><br> +See also <A href="ltx-111.html">Making Paragraphs</A><br> +Return to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 5 Jun 1995. +</address> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-248.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-248.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..0de0c73f47a --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-248.html @@ -0,0 +1,21 @@ +<html> +<head><title>Help On LaTeX \input</title></head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\input</font></h1> + <tt>\input{file}</tt> +<p> + The <tt>\input</tt> command causes the indicated <tt>file</tt> + to be read and processed, + exactly as if its contents had been inserted in the current file at + that point. The file name may be a complete file name with extension + or just a first name, in which case the file <tt>file.tex</tt> is used. +<hr> +See also <A href="ltx-165.html">Splitting the Input</A><br> +See also <A href="ltx-245.html"><tt>\include</tt></A><br> +Return to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 30 Oct 1995. +</address> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-249.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-249.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..18c1d92a31e --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-249.html @@ -0,0 +1,18 @@ +<html> +<head><title>Help On LaTeX \it</title></head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\it</font></h1> +<p> + Italics typeface. +<p> +This is version 2.09; see also + <a href="fonts2e.html">LaTeX2e font selection</a><br> +<hr> +See also <A href="ltx-176.html">Typefaces</A>, + <A href="ltx-177.html">Styles</A><br> +See also <a href="boldmath.html"><tt>\boldmath</tt></a><br> +Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 16 May 1995. +</address></body></html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-250.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-250.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..c8e7d40c39b --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-250.html @@ -0,0 +1,41 @@ +<html> +<head><title>Help On LaTeX itemize</title></head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">itemize</font></h1> +<pre> + <tt>\begin{itemize} + \item First item + \item Second item + .... + \end{itemize}</tt> +</pre> + + The itemize environment produces a list with "tick-marks" (typically + "bullets" for first level). Itemizations can be + nested within one another, up to four levels deep. +<p> + Each item of an itemized list begins with an + <a href="item.html"><tt>\item</tt></a> command. There + must be at least one <tt>\item</tt> command within the environment. +<p> +The default optional +<tt>label</tt> argument of the <a href="item.html"><tt>\item</tt></a> command +is given by the <tt>\labelitemi, \labelitemii, \labelitemiii, \labelitemiv</tt> +commands, respectively, depending on the nesting level. +These may be redefined with the <a href="ltx-18.html"><tt>\renewcommand</tt></a> +command. For example, to make the first level marks nice five-point stars, +<pre> + <tt>\renewcommand{\labelitemi}{$<a href="ltx-404.html">\star</a>$}</tt> +</pre> +<hr> +See also <A href="ltx-27.html">Environments</A>, + <a href="lists.html">Lists</a>, + <a href="ltx-3.html">Counters</a><br> +See also <a href="item.html"><tt>\item</tt></a><br> +Return to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 18 May 1995. +</address> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-251.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-251.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..8ad9d646231 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-251.html @@ -0,0 +1,22 @@ +<html> +<head><title>Help On LaTeX \kill</title></head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\kill</font></h1> + The <tt>\kill</tt> command allows you to set tab stops without producing text. + It works just like the + <a href="ltx-181.html"><tt>\\</tt></a> except + that it throws away the current line + instead of producing output for it. The effect of any + <a href="ltx-187.html"><tt>\=</tt></a>, + <a href="ltx-190.html"><tt>\+</tt></a> or + <a href="ltx-182.html"><tt>\-</tt></a> + commands in that line remain in effect. +<hr> +See also <A href="ltx-58.html">Tabbing</A> Environment<br> +Return to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 29 Jun 1995. +</address> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-252.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-252.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..3e70e99f308 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-252.html @@ -0,0 +1,48 @@ +<html> +<head><title>Help On LaTeX \label</title></head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\label</font></h1> +<p> + <tt>\label{key}</tt> +<p> + + A <tt>\label</tt> command appearing in ordinary text assigns to the + <tt>key</tt> the + number of the current sectional unit; one appearing inside a numbered + environment assigns that number to the <tt>key</tt>. +<p> + A <tt>key</tt> can consist of any sequence of letters, digits, or punctuation + characters. Upper- and lowercase letters are different. +<p> + The number assigned to the key can be accessed by use of the + <a href="ltx-303.html"><tt>\ref</tt></a> command. For example, +<pre> + \begin{equation} .... + .... + \label{eq:no1} + \end{equation} + ... + One can see from Eq.~(\ref{eq:no1}) that ... +</pre> +<p> +In a <a href="ltx-67.html">table</a> or <a href="ltx-225.html">figure</a> +environment, the <tt>\label</tt> command should follow the +<a href="caption.html"><tt>\caption</tt></a> command (or be part of its +argument) since it is the <tt>\caption</tt> command which generates the +number. +<p> +The <tt>\label</tt> command is <a href="fragile.html">fragile</a> but it +can be used in the argument of a +<a href="ltx-141.html">sectioning command</a> or +<a href="caption.html"><tt>\caption</tt></a> command. +<hr> +See also <A href="ltx-13.html">Cross References</A><br> +See also <a href="ltx-303.html"><tt>\ref</tt></a>, + <a href="ltx-291.html"><tt>\pageref</tt></a> <br> +Return to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 29 Jun 1995. +</address> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-253.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-253.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..9413e7a7f59 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-253.html @@ -0,0 +1,15 @@ +<html> +<head><title>Help On LaTeX \large</title></head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\large</font></h1> + Slightly larger than default typeface size. +<hr> +See also <A href="ltx-176.html">Typefaces</A>, + <A href="ltx-178.html">Sizes</A><br> +Return to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 29 Jun 1995. +</address> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-254.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-254.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..6a981aa4a57 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-254.html @@ -0,0 +1,16 @@ +<html> +<head><title>Help On LaTeX \Large (capital "l")</title></head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\Large (capital "l")</font></h1> + Fourth largest of typefaces available. Is generally the default for + titles. +<hr> +See also <A href="ltx-176.html">Typefaces</A>, + <A href="ltx-178.html">Sizes</A><br> +Return to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 29 Jun 1995. +</address> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-255.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-255.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..d1d96f9c62a --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-255.html @@ -0,0 +1,14 @@ +<html> +<head><title>Help On LaTeX \LARGE (all caps)</title></head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\LARGE (all caps)</font></h1> + Third largest of typefaces available. +<hr> +See also <A href="ltx-176.html">Typefaces</A>, + <A href="ltx-178.html">Sizes</A><br> +Return to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 29 Jun 1995. +</address> +</body></html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-256.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-256.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..5ba330fb9fc --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-256.html @@ -0,0 +1,25 @@ +<html> +<head><title>Help On LaTeX \ldots</title> +</head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\ldots</font></h1> + The <tt>\ldots</tt> command produces an ellipsis.<br> + Unlike <tt>\cdots, \ddots, \vdots,</tt> + this command works in any mode, not just math mode. +<p> +See also: +<ul> + <li><A href="ltx-207.html">\cdots</A> + <li><A href="ltx-218.html">\ddots</A> + <li><A href="ltx-340.html">\vdots</A> +<p> + <li><A href="ltx-115.html">Math Formulas</A>, + <li><A href="ltx-119.html">Math Miscellany</A>. +</ul> +Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 25 April 1995. +</address> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-257.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-257.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..616a63de4f0 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-257.html @@ -0,0 +1,29 @@ +<html> +<head><title>Help On LaTeX \line</title></head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\line</font></h1> +<p> + <tt>\line(x-slope,y-slope){length}</tt> +<p> + The <tt>\line</tt> command draws a line of the specified length and slope. +<p> +The slope is determined by <tt>(x-slope,y-slope)</tt> which are signed +integers of magnitude less than or equal to 6 and which have no common +divisor except for plus or minus one; For example (1,0) is a horizontal +line; (1,1) gives a slope of +45 degress; (0,1) is a vertical line; (-1,1) is 135 degrees. +<p> +The <strong>horizontal</strong> extent of the line is given by the +<tt>length</tt> parameter, except in the case of a vertical line in +which case <tt>length</tt> specifies the vertical height. +<hr> +See also <A href="ltx-27.html">Environments</A>, + <A href="ltx-43.html">picture</A><br> +See also <a href="ltx-341.html"><tt>\vector</tt></a><br> +Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 12 May 1995. +</address> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-258.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-258.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..ef7125b06bf --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-258.html @@ -0,0 +1,25 @@ +<html> +<head><title>Help On LaTeX \linebreak</title></head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\linebreak</font></h1> +<p> + <tt>\linebreak[number]</tt> +<p> + The <tt>\linebreak</tt> command tells LaTeX to break the current line at the + point of the command. With the optional argument, number, you can + convert the <tt>\linebreak</tt> command from a demand to a request. The number + must be a number from 0 to 4. The higher the number, the more + insistent the request is. +<p> + The <tt>\linebreak</tt> command causes LaTeX to stretch the line so it extends + to the right margin. +<p> +<hr> +See also <A href="ltx-99.html">Line and Page Breaking</A><br> +Go to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 5 May 1995. +</address> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-259.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-259.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..9bce5892257 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-259.html @@ -0,0 +1,20 @@ +<html> +<head><title>Help On LaTeX \linethickness</title></head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\linethickness</font></h1> + <tt>\linethickness{dimension}</tt> +<p> + Declares the thickness of horizontal and vertical lines in a picture + environment to be dimension, which must be a positive length. It does + not affect the thickness of slanted lines and circles, or the quarter + circles drawn by <tt>\oval</tt> to form the corners of an oval. +<hr> +See also: <A href="ltx-86.html">Lengths</A>, + <A href="ltx-43.html">Picture Environment</A><br> +Return to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 29 Jun 1995. +</address> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-260.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-260.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..f89f998f05c --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-260.html @@ -0,0 +1,95 @@ +<html> +<head><title>Help On LaTeX list enviroment</title></head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">list</font></h1> +<p> +<p><pre> + <tt>\begin{list}{label}{spacing} + \item First item + \item Second item + .... + \end{list}</tt> +</pre> + The <tt>label</tt> argument specifies the <em>default</em> label for items + in the list; it may be overriden with the optional argument of the + <a href="item.html"><tt>\item</tt></a> command. It is + a piece of text that is inserted in a box to form the + label. This argument can and usually does contain other LaTeX + commands. +<p> + The <tt>spacing</tt> argument contains commands to change the spacing + parameters for the list. This argument will most often be null, i.e. + <tt>{}</tt>. This will select default spacings, which depends on the + <a href="ltx-22.html">document style</a> and options, and + which should suffice for + most cases. However, the commands which can be put here are +<ul> +<li><tt>\topsep</tt> amount of extra vertical space at top of list +<li><tt>\partopsep</tt> extra length at top if environment is prececed + by a blank line (it should be a <a href="ltx-86.html#rubber">rubber length</a>) +<li><tt>\itemsep</tt> amount of extra vertical space between items +<li><tt>\parsep</tt> amount of vertical space between paragraphs <em>within</em> + an item +<li><tt>\leftmargin</tt> horizontal distance between the left margins of + the environment and the list; must be nonnegative +<li><tt>\rightmargin</tt> horizontal distance betwen the right margins of + the enviroment and the list; must be nonnegative +<li><tt>\listparindent</tt> amount of extra space for paragraph indent <em>after + the first</em> in an item; can be negative +<li><tt>\itemindent</tt> indentation of first line of an item; can be negative +<li><tt>\labelsep</tt> separation between end of the box containing the label + and the text of the first line of an item +<li><tt>\labelwidth</tt> normal width of the box containing the label; if the + actual label is bigger, the natural width is used, extending into the + space for the first line of the item's text +<li><tt>\makelabel{label}</tt> generates the label printed by the + <tt>\item</tt> command +<p> +<li><a href="ltx-338.html"><tt>\usecounter{ctr}</tt></a> + enables the counter <tt>ctr</tt> to be used + for numbering items; it is initialized to zero and stepped when + executing an <tt>\item</tt> command that has no optional <tt>label</tt> + argument. +</ul> + +<h2><a name="example">An Example</a></h2> +An simple example of things that can be done with the List Enviroment +will illustrate typical usage of the arguments. The following will +make a list numbered by "Item-#", where the # is an upper case +Roman numeral, and will indent the right margin the same +as the left margin (it is not normally indented in most styles). +<pre> + <tt>% define "Lcount" as a counter + <a href="ltx-271.html">\newcounter</a>{Lcount} + % set the "default" label to print counter as a Roman numeral + \begin{list}{Item-<a href="ltx-305.html">\Roman</a>{Lcount}} + % inform the list command to use this counter + {<a href="ltx-338.html">\usecounter</a>{Lcount} + % set rightmargin equal to leftmargin + <a href="ltx-88.html">\setlength</a>{\rightmargin}{\leftmargin}} + % we can now begin the "items" + <a href="item.html">\item</a> This is the first item + \item And this is the second item + \end{list}</tt> +</pre> +Note that this would produce something like: +<pre> + Item-I This is the first item + Item-II And this is the second item +</pre> +<hr> +See <a href="lists.html">Lists</a>, + <a href="ltx-27.html">Environments</a>, + <a href="ltx-3.html">Counters</a>, + <a href="ltx-86.html">Lenghts</a><br> +See also <a href="item.html"><tt>\item</tt></a><br> +Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 23 Oct 1995. +</address> +</body> +</html> + + + diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-261.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-261.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..5800bce00e1 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-261.html @@ -0,0 +1,17 @@ +<html> +<head><title>Help On LaTeX \location</title></head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\location</font></h1> + <tt>\location{address}</tt> +<p> + This modifies your organization's standard address. This only appears + if the firstpage pagestyle is selected. +<hr> +See also: <A href="ltx-91.html">Letters</A><br> +Return to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 23 Jun 1995. +</address> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-262.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-262.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..074fa60fdc8 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-262.html @@ -0,0 +1,62 @@ +<html> +<head><title>Help On LaTeX \makebox</title></head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\makebox</font></h1> +<h2>Normal use</h2> + <tt>\makebox[width][position]{text}</tt> +<p> + The <tt>\makebox</tt> command creates a box to contain the specified + <tt>text</tt>. The + width of the box may be specified by the optional <tt>width</tt> argument. + The <tt>text</tt> in the box is set in LR mode. +<p> + If the optional <tt>width</tt> argument is used, the optional + <tt>position</tt> argument may also be used to specify the position of + <tt>text</tt> within the box as follows: +<ul> +<li><tt>l</tt> - flushleft +<li><tt>r</tt> - flushright +<li><tt>s</tt> - interword space adjusted so <tt>text</tt> fills box exactly +</ul> +The default horizontal and vertical positioning (if the second optional +argument is omitted) is to center <tt>text</tt> +in the box. +<p> +Note that <tt>text</tt> may overflow the box, in which case it is +typeset on top of the adjacent text. While this is generally undesirable, +it can also be used to create special effects. +<p> +The <tt>\makebox</tt> command is <a href="fragile.html">fragile</a>. +<p> +See <tt><a href="ltx-265.html">\mbox</a></tt>, + <tt><a href="ltx-237.html">\framebox</a></tt><br> +See also: <A href="ltx-143.html">Spaces and Boxes</A>. + +<h2>In picture environment</h2> + <tt>\makebox(width,height)[position]{ ... }</tt> +<p> + The <tt>\makebox</tt> command for the picture environment is similar to the + normal <tt>\makebox</tt> command except that you must specify a width and + height (note that these are in parentheses) in multiples of + <a href="unitlength.html"><tt>\unitlength</tt></a>. +<p> + The optional argument, <tt>position</tt>, specifies the quadrant that your + text appears in. You may select up to two of the following: +<ul> +<li><TT>t</TT> Moves the item to the top of the rectangle +<li><TT>b</TT> Moves the item to the bottom +<li><TT>l</TT> Moves the item to the left +<li><TT>r</TT> Moves the item to the right +</ul> +The default horizontal and vertical positioning is to center <tt>text</tt> +in the box. +<hr> +See also <a href="ltx-143.html">Spaces and Boxes</a>, + <A href="ltx-43.html">Picture Environment</A><br> +Return to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 5 Dec 1995. +</address> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-263.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-263.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..b1760e41993 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-263.html @@ -0,0 +1,33 @@ +<html><head><title>Help On LaTeX \maketitle</title> +</head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\maketitle</font></h1> + <tt>\maketitle</tt> +<p> + The <tt>\maketitle</tt> command generates a title on a separate title page - + except in the article style, where the title normally goes at the top + of the first page. Information used to produce the title is obtained + from the following declarations, which should precede the + <tt>\maketitle</tt> command. +<ul> +<li><A href="ltx-203.html"><tt>\author</tt></A> +<li><A href="ltx-217.html"><tt>\date</tt></A> +<li><A href="ltx-324.html"><tt>\thanks</tt></A> +<li><A href="ltx-329.html"><tt>\title</tt></A> +</ul> +<p> +The <a href="ltx-78.html">Titlepage Environment</a> +allows you to design your own title page, rather than using that +created by the <tt>\maketitle</tt> command whose format is determined +by the <a href="ltx-22.html">document style</a>. +. +<hr> +See also: <A href="ltx-131.html">Page Styles</A>, + <a href="ltx-78.html">Titlepage Environment</a><br> +Go to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 16 Nov 1995. +</address> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-264.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-264.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..8395d8863f1 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-264.html @@ -0,0 +1,33 @@ +<html><head> +<title>Help On LaTeX \markboth \markright</title> +</head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\markboth \markright</font></h1> +<p> + <tt>\markboth{left head}{right head}</tt> +<p> + <tt> \markright{right head}</tt> +<p> + + The <tt>\markboth</tt> and <tt>\markright</tt> + commands are used in conjunction with the + page style myheadings for setting either both or just the right + heading. In addition to their use with the myheadings page style, you + can use them to override the normal headings in the headings style, + since LaTeX uses these same commands to generate those heads. You + should note that a left-hand heading is generated by the last + <tt>\markboth</tt> command before the end of the page, while a right-hand + heading is generated by the first <tt>\markboth</tt> or <tt>\markright</tt> + that comes + on the page if there is one, otherwise by the last one before the + page. +<hr> +See also: <A href="ltx-131.html">Page Styles</A>, +<A href="ltx-138.html"><tt>\pagestyle</tt></A>.<br> +Go to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 17 May 1995. +</address> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-265.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-265.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..d4d1b8a3a8d --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-265.html @@ -0,0 +1,35 @@ +<html> +<head><title>Help On LaTeX \mbox</title></head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\mbox</font></h1> +<p> + <tt>\mbox{text}</tt> +<p> + + The <tt>\mbox</tt> command creates a box just wide enough to hold the + <tt>text</tt> in its argument. The <tt>text</tt> in the box is in LR + <a href="ltx-130.html">mode</a> which prevents it from being broken across + lines. +<p> + The <a href="ltx-262.html"><tt>\makebox</tt></a> command is similar + except that it allows you to specify a width which is not necessarily + the natural width of the <tt>text</tt> and also to specify the placement + within the box. +<p> +An <tt>\mbox</tt> within <a href="ltx-130.html">math mode</a> does +<strong>not</strong> use the current <a href="mathfonts.html">math font</a>; +rather it uses the <a href="ltx-176.html">typeface</a> of the surrounding +running text. +<p> +The <tt>\mbox</tt> command is <a href="fragile.html">robust</a>. +<hr> +See <a href="ltx-226.html"><tt>\fbox</tt></a>, + <a href="ltx-262.html"><tt>\makebox</tt></a><br> +See also <A href="ltx-143.html">Spaces and Boxes</A><br> +Return to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 8 Aug 1995. +</address> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-266.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-266.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..d6c56fb7ec8 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-266.html @@ -0,0 +1,17 @@ +<html> +<head><title>Help On LaTeX \medskip</title></head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\medskip</font></h1> +<p> + The <tt>\medskip</tt> command is equivalent to + <tt><a href="ltx-347.html">\vspace</a>{\medskipamount}</tt> where + <tt>\medskipamount</tt> is determined by the document style. +<hr> +See <a href="ltx-143.html">Spaces and Boxes</a><br> +Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 10 May 1995. +</address> +</body></html> + diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-267.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-267.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..123f724b200 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-267.html @@ -0,0 +1,52 @@ +<html> +<head><title>Help On LaTeX minipage</title></head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">minipage</font></h1> +<pre> + \begin{minipage}[position]{width} + text + \end{minipage} +</pre> + The minipage environment is similar to a + <a href="ltx-294.html"><tt>\parbox</tt></a> command. It takes + the same optional position argument and mandatory width argument. You + may use other paragraph-making environments such as the + <a href="lists.html">list-making</a> and + <a href="ltx-68.html">tabular</a> environments inside a minipage. You can + also use the minipage environment or + <a href="ltx-294.html"><tt>\parbox</tt></a> command to put one or + more paragraphs + inside of a <a href="ltx-43.html">picture environment</a> or as a + <a href="ltx-67.html">table item</a>, for example. +<p> + There is no paragraph indentation in the minipage environment. That is, + LaTeX sets <a href="ltx-86.html#lencmd"><tt>\parindent</tt></a> to zero; + however, you may override this with a + <a href="ltx-88.html"><tt>\setlength</tt></a> command. +<p> + Footnotes in a minipage environment are handled in a way that is + particularly useful for putting footnotes in figures or tables. A + <a href="ltx-231.html"><tt>\footnote</tt></a> command puts the + footnote at the bottom of + the minipage instead of at the bottom of the page, and it uses the + <tt>mpfootnote</tt> <a href="ltx-3.html">counter</a> instead of the ordinary + footnote counter. If you want the footnote in a minipage environment + to be placed at the bottom of the actual page, in the usual fashion, + use the <a href="ltx-232.html"><tt>\footnotemark</tt></a> and + <a href="ltx-234.html"><tt>\footnotetext</tt></a> commands. +<p> + <strong>Note</strong>: if you put one minipage inside another + and if you are using + footnotes, they may wind up at the bottom of the wrong minipage. + +<hr> +See also <A href="ltx-27.html">Environments</A>, + <a href="ltx-143.html">Spaces and Boxes</a><br> +See also <a href="ltx-294.html"><tt>\parbox</tt></a><br> +Return to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 22Nov 1995. +</address> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-268.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-268.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..1076a69b3aa --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-268.html @@ -0,0 +1,42 @@ +<html> +<head><title>Help On LaTeX \multicolumn</title></head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\multicolumn</font></h1> +<p> + <tt>\multicolumn{cols}{pos}{text}</tt> +<p> + Used only in <a href="ltx-202.html">array</a> or + <a href="ltx-68.html">tabular</a> environments. +<p> + The <tt>\multicolumn</tt> is command is + used to make an entry that spans several columns. +<p> + It is useful for making table headings which span several columns, or + for changing the positioning of the heading for a single column (the + <tt>pos</tt> argument in <tt>\multicolumn</tt> overriding that of + the <tt>\tabular</tt> value, for example). +<p> + The first mandatory argument, <tt>cols</tt>, specifies the number of columns to + span. The second mandatory argument, <tt>pos</tt>, specifies the formatting of + the entry; +<ul> +<li>c for centered +<li>l for flushleft +<li>r for flushright +</ul> + The third mandatory argument, <tt>text</tt>, + specifies what text is to make up the entry. +<p> + <tt>\multicolumn</tt> must either begin a row or be placed immediately + after an <tt>&</tt>. + +<hr>See also <A href="ltx-27.html">Environments</A>, + <a href="ltx-202.html">array</a>, + <A href="ltx-68.html">tabular</A><br> +Go to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 2 May 1995. +</address> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-269.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-269.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..cb6e02dcb4c --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-269.html @@ -0,0 +1,19 @@ +<html> +<head><title>Help On LaTeX \multiput</title></head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\multiput</font></h1> +<p> + <tt>\multiput(x coord,y coord)(delta x,delta y){number of copies}{object}</tt> +<p> + The <tt>\multiput</tt> command can be used when you are putting the same object + in a regular pattern across a picture. +<hr> +See also <A href="ltx-27.html">Environments</A>, + <A href="ltx-43.html">picture</A><br> +Return to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 12 May 1995. +</address> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-27.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-27.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..9746d13ae2a --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-27.html @@ -0,0 +1,65 @@ +<html> +<head><title>Help On LaTeX Environments</title></head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">Environments</font></h1> +<p> + LaTeX provides a number of different paragraph-making environments. + Each environment begins and ends in the same manner. +<p> +<pre> + \begin{environment-name} + .... + .... + \end{environment-name} +</pre> +Blank lines before the <tt>\begin{}</tt> or after the <tt>\end{}</tt> cause a +paragraph break before or after the environment. +Blank lines after the <tt>\begin{}</tt> or before the <tt>\end{}</tt> are +ignored. +<p> +All <a href="declarations.html">declarations</a> have an environment of the +same name. However, the reverse does not always work. For example, +<tt>{\abstract Abstract text ... .}</tt> may not give correct paragraph +breaks. + +<H2>Subtopics</H2> +<ul> +<li><a href="ltx-420.html">abstract</a> +<li><A href="ltx-202.html">array</A> +<li><A href="ltx-29.html">center</A> +<li><A href="ltx-31.html">description</A> +<li><a href="ltx-421.html">displaymath</a> +<li><A href="ltx-222.html">enumerate</A> +<li><A href="ltx-223.html">eqnarray</A> +<li><A href="ltx-224.html">equation</A> +<li><A href="ltx-225.html">figure</A> +<li><A href="ltx-228.html">flushleft</A> +<li><A href="ltx-229.html">flushright</A> +<li><A href="ltx-250.html">itemize</A> +<li><A href="ltx-260.html">list</A> +<li><a href="ltx-115.html#math">math</a> +<li><A href="ltx-267.html">minipage</A> +<li><A href="ltx-43.html">picture</A> +<li><A href="ltx-297.html">quotation</A> +<li><A href="ltx-298.html">quote</A> +<li><A href="ltx-58.html">tabbing</A> +<li><A href="ltx-67.html">table</A> +<li><A href="ltx-68.html">tabular</A> +<li><A href="ltx-73.html">thebibliography</A> +<li><A href="ltx-77.html">theorem</A> +<li><A href="ltx-78.html">titlepage</A> +<li><a href="trivlist.html">trivlist</a> +<li><A href="ltx-79.html">verbatim</A> +<li><A href="ltx-81.html">verse</A> +</ul> +<hr> +See also <a href="declarations.html">Declarations</a>, + <a href="ltx-3.html">Counters</a><br> +Return to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 16 Nov 1995. +</address> +</body> +</html> + diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-271.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-271.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..856bad72da7 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-271.html @@ -0,0 +1,22 @@ +<html> +<head><title>Help On LaTeX \newcounter</title></head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\newcounter</font></h1> +<p> + <tt>\newcounter{newname}[oldcounter]</tt> +<p> + The <tt>\newcounter</tt> command defines a new counter named +<tt>newname</tt>. The optional + argument <tt>oldcounter</tt> must be the name of an already defined + counter; if present the new counter, <tt>newname</tt>, will be + reset whenever <tt>oldcounter</tt>, the counter named in the optional + argument, is incremented. +<hr> +See also <A href="ltx-3.html">Counters</A><br> +Go to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 29 Jun 1995. +</address> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-275.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-275.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..4765fb318c0 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-275.html @@ -0,0 +1,17 @@ +<html> +<head><title>Help On LaTeX \newline</title></head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\newline</font></h1> +<p> + The <tt>\newline</tt> command breaks the line right where it is. The + <tt>\newline</tt> + command can be used only in paragraph mode. +<hr> +See also <A href="ltx-99.html">Line and Page Breaking</A><br> +Go to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 5 May 1995. +</address> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-276.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-276.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..5d8a4bd2310 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-276.html @@ -0,0 +1,15 @@ +<html> +<head><title>Help On LaTeX \newpage</title></head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\newpage</font></h1> +<p> + The <tt>\newpage</tt> command ends the current page. +<hr> +See also <A href="ltx-99.html">Line and Page Breaking</A><br> +Go to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 5 May 1995. +</address> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-277.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-277.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..bb7aa8fbaf0 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-277.html @@ -0,0 +1,25 @@ +<html> +<head><title>Help On LaTeX \newsavebox</title></head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\newsavebox</font></h1> +<p> + <tt>\newsavebox{cmd}</tt> +<p> + + Declares <tt>cmd</tt>, which must be a command name that is not already + defined, to be a bin for saving boxes. +<p> + The <tt>\newsavebox</tt> command is a global + <a href="declarations.html">declaration</a>. +<p> + The <tt>\newsavebox</tt> command is <a href="fragile.html">fragile</a>. +<hr> +See <a href="ltx-143.html">Spaces and Boxes</a><br> +See <a href="ltx-307.html"><tt>\sbox</tt> and <tt>\savebox</tt></a><br> +Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 15 Aug 1995. +</address> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-279.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-279.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..b4f1298c1a8 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-279.html @@ -0,0 +1,19 @@ +<html> +<head><title>Help On LaTeX \nocite</title></head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\nocite</font></h1> + <tt>\nocite{key_list}</tt> +<p> + The <tt>\nocite</tt> command produces no text, but writes key_list, which is a + list of one or more citation keys, on the aux file. +<p> + The <tt>\nocite</tt> command is <a href="fragile.html">fragile</a>. +<hr> +See also: <A href="ltx-73.html">thebibliography</A><br> +Return to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 4 Jul 1995. +</address> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-280.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-280.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..78ec8877b28 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-280.html @@ -0,0 +1,18 @@ +<html> +<head><title>Help On LaTeX \noindent</title></head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\noindent</font></h1> + When used at the beginning of the paragraph, it suppresses the + paragraph indentation. It has no effect when used in the middle of a + paragraph. +<p> +<hr> +See also <a href="ltx-247.html"><tt>\indent</tt></a><br> +See also: <A href="ltx-111.html">Making Paragraphs</A><br> +Return to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 5 Jun 1995. +</address> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-281.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-281.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..810ea9dffbc --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-281.html @@ -0,0 +1,22 @@ +<html> +<head><title>Help On LaTeX \nolinebreak</title></head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\nolinebreak</font></h1> +<p> + <tt>\nolinebreak[number]</tt> +<p> + The <tt>\nolinebreak</tt> command prevents LaTeX from breaking the current + line at the point of the command. With the optional argument, + <tt>number</tt>, you can convert the + <tt>\nolinebreak</tt> command from a demand to a + request. The number must be a number from 0 to 4. The higher the + number, the more insistent the request is. +<hr> +See also <A href="ltx-99.html">Line and Page Breaking</A><br> +Go to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 5 May 1995. +</address> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-282.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-282.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..beb6444b52e --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-282.html @@ -0,0 +1,17 @@ +<html> +<head><title>Help On LaTeX \normalsize</title></head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\normalsize</font></h1> + This is the default type size. + The size of <tt>\normalsize</tt> is defined by as 10pt unless the 11pt or 12pt + document style option is used. +<hr> +See also <A href="ltx-176.html">Typefaces</A>, + <A href="ltx-178.html">Sizes</A><br> +Return to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 29 Jun 1995. +</address> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-283.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-283.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..c6be23554e3 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-283.html @@ -0,0 +1,21 @@ +<html> +<head><title>Help On LaTeX \nopagebreak</title></head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\nopagebreak</font></h1> +<p> + <tt>\nopagebreak[number]</tt> +<p> + The <tt>\nopagebreak</tt> command prevents LaTeX form breaking the current page + at the point of the command. With the optional argument, <tt>number</tt>, you + can convert the <tt>\nopagebreak</tt> command from a demand to a request. The + number must be a number from 0 to 4. The higher the number, the more + insistent the request is. +<hr> +See also <A href="ltx-99.html">Line and Page Breaking</A><br> +Go to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 5 May 1995. +</address> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-284.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-284.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..43be5c73ceb --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-284.html @@ -0,0 +1,18 @@ +<html> +<head><title>Help On LaTeX \onecolumn</title></head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\onecolumn</font></h1> + The <tt>\onecolumn</tt> declaration starts a new page and produces + single-column output. +<p> +This command is <a href="fragile.html">fragile</a>. +<hr> +See also <A href="ltx-22.html">Document Styles</A><br> +See also <a href="ltx-332.html"><tt>\twocolumn</tt></a><br> +Return to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 7 Jul 1995. +</address> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-286.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-286.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..0abec109128 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-286.html @@ -0,0 +1,23 @@ +<html> +<head><title>Help On LaTeX \oval</title></head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\oval</font></h1> + <tt>\oval(width,height)[portion]</tt> +<p> + The <tt>\oval</tt> command produces a rectangle with rounded corners. The + optional argument, <tt>portion</tt>, allows you to select part of the oval. +<ul> +<li><TT>t</TT> Selects the top portion +<li><TT>b</TT> Selects the bottom portion +<li><TT>r</TT> Selects the right portion +<li><TT>l</TT> Selects the left portion +</ul> +<hr> +See also <A href="ltx-43.html">Picture Environment</A><br> +Return to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 29 Jun 1995. +</address> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-287.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-287.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..879f0a4f1be --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-287.html @@ -0,0 +1,29 @@ +<html> +<head><title>Help On LaTeX \overbrace</title> +</head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\overbrace</font></h1> +<p> + <tt>\overbrace{equation}</tt> +<p> + + The <tt>\overbrace</tt> command generates a brace over + <tt>equation</tt>; math mode. +<p> + To "label" the overbrace, use a <a href="ltx-180.html">superscript</a>. +<hr> +See also: +<ul> +<li><A href="ltx-115.html">Math Formulas</A> +<li><A href="ltx-119.html">Math Miscellany</A> +<li><a href="ltx-288.html"><tt>\overline</tt></a> +<li><a href="ltx-335.html"><tt>\underbrace</tt></a> +<li><a href="ltx-336.html"><tt>\underline</tt></a> +</ul> +Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 31 May 1995. +</address> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-288.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-288.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..5f973045166 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-288.html @@ -0,0 +1,26 @@ +<html> +<head><title>Help On LaTeX \overline</title> +</head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\overline</font></h1> +<p> + <tt>\overline{equation}</tt> +<p> + + The <tt>\overline</tt> command causes the argument + <tt>equation</tt> to be overlined; math mode. +<hr> +See also: +<ul> +<li><A href="ltx-115.html">Math Formulas</A> +<li><A href="ltx-119.html">Math Miscellany</A> +<li><a href="ltx-287.html"><tt>\overbrace</tt></a> +<li><a href="ltx-335.html"><tt>\underbrace</tt></a> +<li><a href="ltx-336.html"><tt>\underline</tt></a> +</ul> +Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 31 May 1995. +</address> +</body></html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-289.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-289.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..d425455d209 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-289.html @@ -0,0 +1,22 @@ +<html> +<head><title>Help On LaTeX \pagebreak</title></head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\pagebreak</font></h1> +<p> + <tt>\pagebreak[number]</tt> +<p> + The <tt>\pagebreak</tt> command tells LaTeX to break the current page at the + point of the command. With the optional argument, <tt>number</tt>, you can + convert the <tt>\pagebreak</tt> command from a demand to a request. The number + must be a number from 0 to 4. The higher the number, the more + insistent the request is. +<p> +<hr> +See also <A href="ltx-99.html">Line and Page Breaking</A><br> +Go to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 5 May 1995. +</address> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-29.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-29.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..96782cb74ec --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-29.html @@ -0,0 +1,28 @@ +<html> +<head><title>Help On LaTeX center</title> +</head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">center</font></h1> +<p><pre> + \begin{center} + Text on line 1 \\ + Text on line 2 \\ + ... + ... + \end{center} +</pre> + + The center environment allows you to create a paragraph consisting of + lines that are centered within the left and right margins on the + current page. Each line must be terminated with the string <tt>\\.</tt> +<hr> +See also <A href="ltx-30.html"><tt>\centering</tt></A><br> +See also <a href="ltx-228.html">Flushleft</a>, + <a href="ltx-229.html">Flushright</a> Environments<br> +Return to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 5 Jun 1995. +</address> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-291.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-291.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..b307fdd1216 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-291.html @@ -0,0 +1,22 @@ +<html> +<head><title>Help On LaTeX \pageref</title></head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\pageref</font></h1> +<p> + <tt>\pageref{key}</tt> +<p> + + The <tt>\pageref</tt> command produces the page number of the place in the text + where the corresponding + <a href="ltx-252.html"><tt>\label</tt></a> command appears. +<p> +The <tt>\pageref</tt> command is <a href="fragile.html">fragile</a>. +<hr> +See also: <A href="ltx-13.html">Cross References</A><br> +Return to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 4 Jul 1995. +</address> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-293.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-293.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..8c3c0916b17 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-293.html @@ -0,0 +1,17 @@ +<html> +<head><title>Help On LaTeX \par</title> +</head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\par</font></h1> + + Equivalent to a blank line; often used to make command or environment + definitions easier to read. +<hr> +See also: <A href="ltx-111.html">Making Paragraphs</A><br> +Return to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 5 Jun 1995. +</address> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-294.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-294.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..c9801ff9e45 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-294.html @@ -0,0 +1,35 @@ +<html> +<head><title>Help On LaTeX \parbox</title></head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\parbox</font></h1> +<p> + <tt>\parbox[position]{width}{text}</tt> +<p> + + A parbox is a box whose contents are created in paragraph mode. The + <tt>\parbox</tt> has two mandatory arguments: +<ul> +<li> <tt>width</tt>: specifies the width of the parbox, and +<li> <tt>text</tt>: the text that goes inside the parbox. +</ul> + LaTeX will position a parbox so its center lines up with the center of + the text line. An optional first argument allows you to + line up either the top or bottom line in the parbox, by using as optional + <tt>position</tt> argument <tt>t</tt> or <tt>b</tt>, respectively . +<p> + A <tt>\parbox</tt> command is used for a parbox containing a small piece of + text, with nothing fancy inside. In particular, you shouldn't use any + of the paragraph-making environments inside a <tt>\parbox</tt> argument. For + larger pieces of text, including ones containing a paragraph-making + environment, you should use a <a href="ltx-267.html">minipage</a> environment. +<p> +The <tt>\parbox</tt> command is <a href="fragile.html">fragile</a>. +<hr> +See <a href="ltx-143.html">Spaces and Boxes</a><br> +Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 8 Aug 1995. +</address> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-296.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-296.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..acc52f00fde --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-296.html @@ -0,0 +1,30 @@ +<html> +<head><title>Help On LaTeX \put</title></head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\put</font></h1> +<p> + <tt>\put(x-coord,y-coord){object}</tt> +<p> + + The <tt>\put</tt> command places the <tt>object</tt> + specified by the mandatory argument at the given coordinates. +<p> +The coordinates are in units of +<a href="unitlength.html"><tt>\unitlength</tt></a> +<p> +Some of the <tt>object</tt> items you might place are +<ul> +<li><a href="ltx-257.html"><tt>\line</tt></a> +<li><a href="ltx-341.html"><tt>\vector</tt></a> +<li><a href="ltx-210.html"><tt>\circle</tt></a> +<li><a href="ltx-286.html"><tt>\oval</tt></a> +</ul> +See also: <A href="ltx-27.html">Environments</A>, + <A href="ltx-43.html">picture</A><br> +Return to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 12 May 1995. +</address> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-297.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-297.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..1712de6aff7 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-297.html @@ -0,0 +1,26 @@ +<html> +<head><title>Help On LaTeX quotation</title> +</head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">quotation</font></h1> +<pre> + \begin{quotation} + text + \end{quotation} +</pre> + The margins of the quotation environment are indented on the left and + the right. The text is justified at both margins and there is + paragraph indentation. Leaving a blank line between text produces a + new paragraph. +<p> + For a short quote (one paragraph), use the + <a href="ltx-298.html">quote environment</a>. +<hr> +See also <A href="ltx-298.html">Quote Environment</A><br> +Return to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 27 Sep 1995. +</address> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-298.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-298.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..415c6a86eb2 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-298.html @@ -0,0 +1,25 @@ +<html> +<head><title>Help On LaTeX quote</title> +</head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">quote</font></h1> +<pre> + \begin{quote} + text + \end{quote} +</pre> + + The margins of the quote environment are indented on the left and the + right. The text is justified at both margins. For longer quotations + (more than one paragraph) use the <a href="ltx-297.html">quotation + environment</a>. + +<hr> +See also <A href="ltx-297.html">Quotation Environment</A><br> +Return to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 27 Sep 1995. +</address> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-299.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-299.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..dad37b276f5 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-299.html @@ -0,0 +1,17 @@ +<html> +<head><title>Help On LaTeX \raggedbottom</title> +</head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\raggedbottom</font></h1> + The <tt>\raggedbottom</tt> declaration makes all pages the height of the text + on that page. No extra vertical space is added. +<hr> +See also <A href="ltx-22.html">Document Styles</A><br> +See also <a href="ltx-227.html"><tt>\flushbottom</tt></a><br> +Return to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 28 Jun 1995. +</address> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-3.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-3.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..2b424b2dd68 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-3.html @@ -0,0 +1,88 @@ +<html> +<head><title>Help On LaTeX Counters</title></head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">Counters</font></h1> +<p> + Everything LaTeX numbers for you has a counter associated with it. The + name of the counter is the same as the name of the environment or + command that produces the number, except with no <tt>\.</tt> Below is a list + of some of the counters used in LaTeX's standard document styles to control + numbering. +<pre> + part paragraph figure enumi + chapter subparagraph table enumii + section page footnote enumiii + subsection equation mpfootnote enumiv + subsubsection +</pre> + +<h2>Manipulating the way counters are printed</h2> +Counters are printed in LaTeX by using a command generated as +"<tt>\the</tt>" suffixed with the name of the counter. Thus, equation +numbers are printed by the <tt>\theequation</tt> command, and +section numbers by the <tt>\thesection</tt> command. +If you want to change the way such numbers are printed, for example, +change from arabic to Roman numerals, you need to redefine the +appropriate command, using the +<tt><a href="ltx-18.html">\renewcommand</a></tt> command. +<p> +As an example, to number equations in an appendix as <tt>A-1</tt>, +<tt>A-2</tt>, ... , use <pre> + <tt>\renewcommand{\theequation}{A-<a href="ltx-201.html">\arabic</a>{equation}}</tt></pre> +The second argument implies that the text produced by the renewed +<tt>\theequation</tt> command will be "A-" followed by the output from +the <tt>\arabic{equation}</tt> command, which is the value of the +equation counter, printed as an arabic number. +<p> +In <a href="lists.html">List Environments</a> the format for the +item labels is given by commands like <tt>\labelitemi</tt> and +<tt>\labelitemii</tt> (for the first two levels of the +<a href="ltx-250.html">Itemize Environment</a>), and like <tt>\labelenumi</tt> +(for the <a href="ltx-222.html">Enumerate Environment</a>), and these may +also be redefined. +<p> +There is an <a href="ltx-260.html#example">example</a> of manipulating such +counters in the discussion of the List Environment. +See also the discussions in the <a href="ltx-250.html">Itemize Environment</a> +and in the <a href="ltx-222.html#example">Enumerate Environment</a>. +<p> +You can force a change in the number produced by any of the counters. For +example, if you wanted to produce a single page numbered 13, you could use +<pre> + <tt><a href="ltx-310.html">\setcounter</a>{page}{13}</tt></pre> +A variety of commands for manipulating counters this way are given below. + +<H2>Related topics</H2> +<ul> +<li>Commands that manupulate counters +<ul> +<li><A href="ltx-195.html">\addtocounter</A> +<li><A href="ltx-271.html">\newcounter</A> +<li><A href="ltx-310.html">\setcounter</A> +<li><A href="ltx-338.html">\usecounter</A> +<li><A href="ltx-339.html">\value</A> +<li><a href="ltx-18.html">\renewcommand</a> +</ul> +<li>Commands that print the value of a counter in various formats +<ul> +<li><A href="ltx-201.html">\arabic</A> +<li><A href="ltx-199.html">\alph \Alph</A> +<li><A href="ltx-305.html">\roman \Roman</A> +<li><A href="ltx-230.html">\fnsymbol</A> +</ul> +<li>For some examples of usage in list environments, see +<ul> +<li><a href="ltx-260.html#example">List Enviroment</a> +<li><a href="ltx-250.html">Itemize Environment</a> +<li><a href="ltx-222.html">Enumerate Environment</a> +</ul> +</ul> +<hr> +See also <a href="ltx-141.html">Sectioning</a><br> +Return to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 25 Oct 1995. +</address> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-30.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-30.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..f223a7270ba --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-30.html @@ -0,0 +1,42 @@ +<html> +<head><title>Help On LaTeX \centering</title></head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\centering</font></h1> + +<p>This <a href="declarations.html">declaration</a> +corresponds to the center environment. This +declaration can be used inside an environment such as quote or in a +parbox. The text of a figure or table can be centered on the page by +putting a <tt>\centering</tt> command at the beginning of the figure or table +environment.</p> + +<p>Unlike the <a href="ltx-29.html">center environment</a>, +the <tt>\centering</tt> command does not start +a new paragraph; it simply changes how LaTeX formats paragraph units. +To affect a paragraph unit's format, the scope of the declaration +must contain the blank line or <tt>\end</tt> command (of an environment like +quote) that ends the paragraph unit.</p> + +<p><it>Editor's note: although not listed as <a href="fragile.html">fragile</a> +in Lamport, I have found it necessary to use a <tt>\protect</tt> when putting +a <tt>\centering</tt> command in a +<a href="ltx-3.html">sectioning command</a>.<br> +For example,</p> + +<pre> + <tt>\section{\protect \centering Centered section heading}</tt> +</pre> + +<hr> + +<p>See also <a href="ltx-29.html">Center environment</a><br> +Return to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a></p> + +<hr> + +<address> +Revised: RBS, 21 February 1997 +</address> + +</body> +</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-300.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-300.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..5fb17cbbba9 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-300.html @@ -0,0 +1,25 @@ +<html> +<head><title>Help On LaTeX \raggedleft</title></head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\raggedleft</font></h1> + This <a href="declarations.html">declaration</a> + corresponds to the <a href="ltx-229.html">flushright + environment</a>. This + declaration can be used inside an environment such as quote or in a + parbox. +<p> + Unlike the flushright environment, the <tt>\raggedleft</tt> command does not + start a new paragraph; it simply changes how LaTeX formats paragraph + units. To affect a paragraph unit's format, the scope of the + declaration must contain the blank line or <tt>\end</tt> command (of an + environment like quote) that ends the paragraph unit. +<hr> +See also <A href="ltx-27.html">Environments</A>, +<A href="ltx-229.html">flushright</A><br> +See also <a href="ltx-301.html"><tt>\raggedright</tt></a><br> +Return to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 5 Jun 1995. +</address> +</body></html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-301.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-301.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..3d85e2cad6c --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-301.html @@ -0,0 +1,25 @@ +<html> +<head><title>Help On LaTeX \raggedright</title></head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\raggedright</font></h1> + This <a href="declarations.html">declaration</a> + corresponds to the <a href="ltx-228.html">flushleft environment</a>. + This declaration can be used inside an environment such as quote or in a + parbox. +<p> + Unlike the flushleft environment, the <tt>\raggedright</tt> command does not + start a new paragraph; it simply changes how LaTeX formats paragraph + units. To affect a paragraph unit's format, the scope of the + declaration must contain the blank line or <tt>\end</tt> command (of an + environment like quote) that ends the paragraph unit. +<hr> +See also <A href="ltx-27.html">Environments</A>, + <a href="ltx-29.html">Center</a>, <a href="ltx-228.html">Flushleft</a><br> +See also <a href="ltx-300.html"><tt>\raggeleft</tt></a><br> +Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 5 Jun 1995. +</address> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-302.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-302.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..5b7e97253d4 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-302.html @@ -0,0 +1,33 @@ +<html> +<head><title>Help On LaTeX \raisebox</title></head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\raisebox</font></h1> +<p> + <tt>\raisebox{distance}[extend-above][extend-below]{text}</tt> +<p> + + The <tt>\raisebox</tt> command creates a LR box containing <tt>text</tt>; + it is used to raise or lower text. The first + mandatory argument specifies how high the text is to be raised (or + lowered if it is a negative amount). +<p> + Sometimes it's useful to make LaTeX think something has a different + size than it really does - or a different size than LaTeX would + normally think it has. The <tt>\raisebox</tt> command lets you tell LaTeX how + tall it is. +<p> + The first optional argument, <tt>extend-above</tt>, makes LaTeX think that the + text extends above the current line by the amount specified. The second + optional argument, <tt>extend-below</tt>, makes LaTeX think that the text + extends below the current line by the amount specified. +<p> + <tt>\raisebox</tt> is <a href="fragile.html">fragile</a>. +<hr> +See <a href="ltx-143.html">Spaces and Boxes</a><br> +Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 8 Aug 1995. +</address> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-303.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-303.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..26d4e22d60b --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-303.html @@ -0,0 +1,27 @@ +<html> +<head><title>Help On LaTeX \ref</title></head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\ref</font></h1> +<p> + <tt>\ref{key}</tt> +<p> + + The <tt>\ref</tt> command produces the number of the sectional unit, equation + number, ... of the corresponding +<a href="ltx-252.html"><tt>\label</tt></a> command. +<p> +Bibliographic references using the +<a href="ltx-73.html"><tt>\thebibliography</tt></a> +mechanism obtain their number or label using +<a href="ltx-211.html"><tt>\cite</tt></a> +<p> +The <tt>\ref</tt> command is <a href="fragile.html">fragile</a>. +<hr> +See also <A href="ltx-13.html">Cross References</A><br> +Return to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 4 Jul 1995. +</address> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-304.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-304.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..a4c495c3194 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-304.html @@ -0,0 +1,21 @@ +<html> +<head><title>Help On LaTeX \rm</title> +</head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\rm</font></h1> +<p> + Roman typeface (default). +<p> +This is version 2.09; see also + <a href="fonts2e.html">LaTeX2e font selection</a><br> +<hr> +See also <A href="ltx-176.html">Typefaces</A>, + <A href="ltx-177.html">Styles</A><br> +See also <a href="boldmath.html"><tt>\boldmath</tt></a><br> +Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 16 May 1995. +</address> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-305.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-305.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..82de9076180 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-305.html @@ -0,0 +1,21 @@ +<html> +<head><title>Help On LaTeX \roman</title></head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\roman</font></h1> + + <tt>\roman{counter}</tt> +<p> + This command causes the current value of <tt>counter</tt> to be printed + in roman numerals. + The <tt>\roman</tt> command causes lower case roman numerals, i.e., + i, ii, iii, ..., while the <tt>\Roman</tt> command causes upper case roman + numerals, i.e., I, II, III... +<hr> +See also <A href="ltx-3.html">Counters</A><br> +Go to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 18 May 1995. +</address> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-306.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-306.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..c9af088929a --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-306.html @@ -0,0 +1,37 @@ +<html> +<head><title>Help On LaTeX \rule</title></head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\rule</font></h1> +<p> + <tt>\rule[raise-height]{width}{height}</tt> +<p> + + The <tt>\rule</tt> command generates a rectangular "blob of ink." + It can be used to produce horizontal or vertical lines. The arguments + are defined as follows. + <ul> + <li><TT>raise-height</TT> specifies how high to raise the rule (optional) + <li><TT>width</TT> specifies the length of the rule (mandatory) + <li><TT>height</TT> specifies the height of the rule (mandatory) + </ul> + The default value for <tt>raise-height</tt> is zero; a negative value + lowers the rule. +<p> + The reference point of the rule box is the lower left-hand corner. +<p> + A rule box of zero width may be used as a "strut" which is invisible but + which causes LaTeX to adjust veritcal spacing to leave room. This can + be particularly useful where the + <a href="ltx-347.html"><tt>\vspace</tt></a> command cannot be used, + for example, within <a href="ltx-115.html">mathematical formulas</a>. +<p> + The <tt>\rule</tt> command is <a href="fragile.html">fragile</a>. +<hr> +See <a href="ltx-143.html">Spaces and Boxes</a><br> +Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 21 Aug 1995. +</address> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-307.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-307.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..0b3f34506b1 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-307.html @@ -0,0 +1,35 @@ +<html> +<head><title>Help On LaTeX \savebox</title></head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\savebox</font></h1> +<p> + <tt>\sbox{cmd}{text}</tt><br> + <tt>\savebox{cmd}[width][pos]{text}</tt> +<p> + These commands typeset <tt>text</tt> in a box just as for + <a href="ltx-265.html"><tt>\mbox</tt></a> or + <a href="ltx-262.html"><tt>\makebox</tt></a>. + However, instead of printing the resulting box, they save it in + the LaTeX command + <tt>cmd</tt>, which must have been declared with + <a href="ltx-277.html"><tt>\newsavebox</tt></a>. + The saved <tt>text</tt> is accessed by a + <a href="ltx-337.html"><tt>\usebox</tt></a> command. +<p> + The <tt>\sbox</tt> and <tt>\savebox</tt> commands are + <a href="declarations.html">declarations</a> with the usual + rules for scope. +<p> + The <tt>\sbox</tt> command is <a href="fragile.html">robust</a>; + the <tt>\savebox</tt> command is <a href="fragile.html">fragile</a>. +<hr> +See <a href="ltx-143.html">Spaces and Boxes</a><br> +See <a href="ltx-277.html"><tt>\newsavebox</tt></a>, + <a href="ltx-337.html"><tt>\usebox</tt></a><br> +Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 15 Aug 1995. +</address> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-308.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-308.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..805a66a89c3 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-308.html @@ -0,0 +1,20 @@ +<html> +<head><title>Help On LaTeX \sc</title></head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\sc</font></h1> +<p> + Small caps typeface. +<p> +This is version 2.09; see also + <a href="fonts2e.html">LaTeX2e font selection</a><br> +<hr> +See also <A href="ltx-176.html">Typefaces</A>, + <A href="ltx-177.html">Styles</A><br> +See also <a href="boldmath.html"><tt>\boldmath</tt></a><br> +Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 16 May 1995. +</address> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-309.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-309.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..1096770416b --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-309.html @@ -0,0 +1,14 @@ +<html> +<head><title>Help On LaTeX \scriptsize</title></head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\scriptsize</font></h1> + Second smallest of 10 typefaces available. +<hr> +See also <A href="ltx-176.html">Typefaces</A>, + <A href="ltx-178.html">Sizes</A><br> +Return to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 29 Jun 1995. +</address> +</body></html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-31.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-31.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..462e493dc11 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-31.html @@ -0,0 +1,32 @@ +<html> +<head><title>Help On LaTeX description</title></head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">description</font></h1> +<p> +<p><pre> + <tt>\begin{description} + <a href="item.html">\item[label]</a> First item + \item[label] Second item + .... + \end{description}</tt> +</pre> + The description environment is used to make labeled lists. The <tt>label</tt> + is bold face and flushed right. The text of the <tt>\item</tt> command + is indented. +<p> + Typical usage is for descriptive lists + or lists of definitions; the <tt>label</tt> is then the name of the + item being described or defined. +<hr> +See also <A href="ltx-27.html">Environments</A>, + <a href="lists.html">Lists</a>, + <a href="ltx-3.html">Counters</a><br> +See also <a href="ltx-222.html">Enumerate</a><br> +See also <a href="item.html"><tt>\item</tt></a><br> +Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 18 May 1995. +</address> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-310.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-310.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..bb877e8b1d6 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-310.html @@ -0,0 +1,20 @@ +<html> +<head><title>Help On LaTeX \setcounter</title></head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\setcounter</font></h1> +<p> + <tt>\setcounter{counter}{value}</tt> +<p> + + The <tt>\setcounter</tt> command sets the value of the specified + <tt>counter</tt> to that + specified by the <tt>value</tt> argument. +<hr> +See also <A href="ltx-3.html">Counters</A><br> +Go to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 2 May 1995. +</address> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-311.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-311.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..18259f9cd11 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-311.html @@ -0,0 +1,29 @@ +<html> +<head><title>Help On LaTeX \settoheight</title></head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\settoheight</font></h1> +<p> + <tt>\settoheight{len-cmd}{text}</tt> +<p> + + The <tt>\settoheight</tt> command sets the value of a + <a href="ltx-86.html#lencmd">length command</a>, <tt>len-cmd</tt>, + which is specified as the first argument, equal to + the maximum height of the <tt>text</tt> argument in the current font. +<p> + For example, +<pre> + <tt>\settoheight{\baselineskip}{Xanadu} + <a href="ltx-88.html">\setlength</a>{\baselineskip}{1.5\baselineskip}</tt> +</pre> +would set the value of <a href="ltx-86.html#lencmd"><tt>\baselineskip</tt></a> +to 1.5 times the height of the capital "X". +<hr> +See <a href="ltx-86.html">Lengths</a><br> +Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 9 May 1995. +</address> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-312.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-312.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..2935570cb4f --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-312.html @@ -0,0 +1,23 @@ +<html> +<head><title>Help On LaTeX \settodepth</title></head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\settodepth</font></h1> +<p> + <tt>\settodepth{len-cmd}{text}</tt> +<p> + + The <tt>\settodepth</tt> command sets the value of a + <a href="ltx-86.html#lencmd">length command</a>, <tt>len-cmd</tt>, + which is specified as the first argument, equal to + the depth (distance below the baseline) + of the <tt>text</tt> argument in the current font. +<p> +<hr> +See <a href="ltx-86.html">Lengths</a><br> +Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 9 May 1995. +</address> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-313.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-313.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..e6b486554a3 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-313.html @@ -0,0 +1,18 @@ +<html> +<head><title>Help On LaTeX \sf</title></head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\sf</font></h1> +<p> + Sans serif typeface. +<p> +This is version 2.09; see also + <a href="fonts2e.html">LaTeX2e font selection</a><br> +<hr> +See also <A href="ltx-176.html">Typefaces</A>, + <A href="ltx-177.html">Styles</A><br> +See also <a href="boldmath.html"><tt>\boldmath</tt></a><br> +Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 16 May 1995. +</address></body></html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-314.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-314.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..bacb8e69752 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-314.html @@ -0,0 +1,25 @@ +<html> +<head><title>Help On LaTeX \shortstack</title> +</head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\shortstack</font></h1> +<p> + <tt>\shortstack[position]{ ... \\ ... \\ ... }</tt> +<p> + The <tt>\shortstack</tt> command produces a stack of objects. The valid + positions are: +<ul> +<li><TT>r</TT> Moves the objects to the right of the stack +<li><TT>l</TT> Moves the objects to the left of the stack +<li><TT>c</TT> Moves the objects to the center of the stack (default) +</ul> +<hr> +See also: <A href="ltx-27.html">Environments</A>, +<A href="ltx-43.html">picture</A><br> +Return to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 27 Sep 1995. +</address> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-315.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-315.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..00db42b0cfc --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-315.html @@ -0,0 +1,21 @@ +<html> +<head><title>Help On LaTeX \signature</title> +</head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\signature</font></h1> +<tt>\signature{Your Name}</tt> +<p> + Your name, as it should appear at the end of the letter underneath the + space for your signature. Items that should go on separate lines + should be separated by + <a href="ltx-181.html"><tt>\\</tt></a> commands. +<hr> +See <a href="ltx-91.html">Letters</a><br> +See <a href="ltx-98.html"><tt>\closing</tt></a><br> +Return to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 24 Jun 1995. +</address> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-316.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-316.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..802fbac2f48 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-316.html @@ -0,0 +1,18 @@ +<html> +<head><title>Help On LaTeX \sl</title></head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\sl</font></h1> +<p> + Slanted typeface. +<p> +This is version 2.09; see also + <a href="fonts2e.html">LaTeX2e font selection</a><br> +<hr> +See also <A href="ltx-176.html">Typefaces</A>, + <A href="ltx-177.html">Styles</A><br> +See also <a href="boldmath.html"><tt>\boldmath</tt></a><br> +Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 16 May 1995. +</address></body></html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-317.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-317.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..c0fc3c21b49 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-317.html @@ -0,0 +1,15 @@ +<html> +<head><title>Help On LaTeX \small</title></head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\small</font></h1> + Slightly smaller than default typeface size. +<hr> +See also <A href="ltx-176.html">Typefaces</A>, + <A href="ltx-178.html">Sizes</A><br> +Return to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 29 Jun 1995. +</address> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-318.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-318.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..7bd0ca09280 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-318.html @@ -0,0 +1,21 @@ +<html> +<head><title>Help On LaTeX \smallskip</title></head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\smallskip</font></h1> +<p> + <tt>\smallskip</tt> +<p> + + The <tt>\smallskip</tt> command is equivalent to + <tt><a href="ltx-347.html">\vspace</a>{\smallskipamount}</tt> where + <tt>\smallskipamount</tt> is determined by the document style. +<hr> +See <a href="ltx-143.html">Spaces and Boxes</a>, + <a href="ltx-86.html">Lengths</a><br> +Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 10 May 1995. +</address> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-319.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-319.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..65392112407 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-319.html @@ -0,0 +1,23 @@ +<html> +<head><title>Help On LaTeX \sqrt</title></head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\sqrt</font></h1> + <tt>\sqrt[root]{arg}</tt> +<p> + The <tt>\sqrt</tt> command produces the square root (radical) symbol with the + argument as radicand. The + optional argument, root, determines what root to produce, i.e. the + cube root of x+y would be typed as <tt>$\sqrt[3]{x+y}$</tt>. +<p> +The radical sign is <a href="ltx-408.html">variable size</a>, that is, +it is made larger if the radicand is, for example, a built-up fraction. +<hr> +See also: <A href="ltx-115.html">Math Formulas</A>, +<A href="ltx-119.html">Math Miscellany</A>.<br> +Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 31 May 1995. +</address> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-323.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-323.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..4340d27eaa3 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-323.html @@ -0,0 +1,19 @@ +<html> +<head><title>Help On LaTeX \telephone</title> +</head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\telephone</font></h1> + <tt>\telephone{number}</tt> +<p> + This is your telephone number. This only appears if the firstpage + pagestyle is selected. +<hr> +See <a href="ltx-91.html">Letters</a><br> +Return to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 24 Jun 1995. +</address> + +</body> +</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-324.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-324.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..204ec9e4fb0 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-324.html @@ -0,0 +1,30 @@ +<html> +<head><title>Help On LaTeX \thanks</title> +</head><body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\thanks</font></h1> +<p> + <tt>\thanks{text}</tt> +<p> + + The <tt>\thanks</tt> command produces a footnote to the title. +<p> +It is typically used as part of the argument of a +<a href="ltx-329.html"><tt>\title</tt></a> or +<a href="ltx-203.html"><tt>\author</tt></a> command. +<p> +For example +<pre> + <tt>\title{Work in Progress + \thanks{Contribution No. 1 from our lab}} + \author{A. Author\thanks{Supported by a grant}}</tt> +</pre> +<hr> +See also <A href="ltx-131.html">Page Styles</A>, +<A href="ltx-263.html"><tt>\maketitle</tt></A>.<br> +Go to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 15 May 1995. +</address> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-328.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-328.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..f247468637f --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-328.html @@ -0,0 +1,16 @@ +<html> +<head><title>Help On LaTeX \tiny</title></head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\tiny</font></h1> + Smallest of 10 typefaces available. All fonts may not be available in + this size. +<hr> +See also <A href="ltx-176.html">Typefaces</A>, + <A href="ltx-178.html">Sizes</A><br> +Return to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 29 Jun 1995. +</address> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-329.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-329.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..74902fc9774 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-329.html @@ -0,0 +1,24 @@ +<html> +<head><title>Help On LaTeX \title</title></head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\title</font></h1> +<p> + <tt>\title{text}</tt> +<p> + The <tt>\title</tt> command declares <tt>text</tt> to be the title. Use + <a href="ltx-181.html"><tt>\\</tt></a> to tell + LaTeX where to start a new line in a long title. +<p> + A footnote to a title is produced with the + <a href="ltx-324.html"><tt>\thanks</tt></a> command. +<hr> +See also <A href="ltx-131.html">Page Styles</A>, + <a href="ltx-78.html">Titlepage Environment</a><br> +See also <A href="ltx-263.html"><tt>\maketitle</tt></A><br> +Go to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 16 Nov 1995. +</address> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-330.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-330.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..49513cecc87 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-330.html @@ -0,0 +1,16 @@ +<html> +<head> +<title>Help On LaTeX \today</title> +</head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\today</font></h1> +The command <tt>\today</tt> generates the current date in the +format Month dd, year. +<hr> +Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 10 May 1995. +</address> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-331.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-331.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..917ba0a38ea --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-331.html @@ -0,0 +1,20 @@ +<html> +<head><title>Help On LaTeX \tt</title></head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\tt</font></h1> +<p> + Typewriter typeface. +<p> +This is version 2.09; see also + <a href="fonts2e.html">LaTeX2e font selection</a><br> +<hr> +See also <A href="ltx-176.html">Typefaces</A>, + <A href="ltx-177.html">Styles</A><br> +See also <a href="boldmath.html"><tt>\boldmath</tt></a><br> +Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 16 May 1995. +</address> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-332.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-332.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..c98b9e94dac --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-332.html @@ -0,0 +1,18 @@ +<html> +<head><title>Help On LaTeX \twocolumn</title></head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\twocolumn</font></h1> + The <tt>\twocolumn</tt> declaration starts a new page and produces two-column + output. +<p> + This command is <a href="fragile.html">fragile</a>. +<hr> +See also <A href="ltx-22.html">Document Styles</A><br> +See also <a href="ltx-284.html"><tt>\onecolumn</tt></a><br> +Return to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 7 Jul 1995. +</address> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-335.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-335.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..38dabf514d9 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-335.html @@ -0,0 +1,28 @@ +<html> +<head><title>Help On LaTeX \underbrace</title></head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\underbrace</font></h1> +<p> + <tt>\underbrace{formula}</tt> +<p> + + The <tt>\underbrace</tt> command generates a brace underneath + the <tt>formula</tt>; math mode. +<p> +To "label" the underbrace, use a <a href="ltx-179.html">subscript</a>. +<hr> +See also: +<ul> +<li><A href="ltx-115.html">Math Formulas</A> +<li><A href="ltx-119.html">Math Miscellany</A> +<li><a href="ltx-287.html"><tt>\overbrace</tt></a> +<li><a href="ltx-288.html"><tt>\overline</tt></a> +<li><a href="ltx-336.html"><tt>\underline</tt></a> +</ul> +Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 31 May 1995. +</address> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-336.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-336.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..ceefcd24112 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-336.html @@ -0,0 +1,28 @@ +<html> +<head><title>Help On LaTeX \underline</title></head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\underline</font></h1> + <tt>\underline{text}</tt> +<p> + The <tt>\underline</tt> command causes the argument text to be underlined. This + command can be used in math mode, paragraph mode, and LR mode. +<p> +This command is <a href="fragile.html">fragile</a> although the +<a href="ltx-288.html"><tt>\overline</tt></a> command is robust. +<hr> +See also: +<ul> +<li><A href="ltx-115.html">Math Formulas</A> +<li><A href="ltx-119.html">Math Miscellany</A> +<li><a href="ltx-287.html"><tt>\overbrace</tt></a> +<li><a href="ltx-288.html"><tt>\overline</tt></a> +<li><a href="ltx-335.html"><tt>\underbrace</tt></a> +</ul> +Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 7 July 1995. +</address> + +</body> +</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-337.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-337.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..f4e30f67bc1 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-337.html @@ -0,0 +1,23 @@ +<html> +<head><title>Help On LaTeX \usebox</title></head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\usebox</font></h1> +<p> + <tt>\usebox{cmd}</tt> +<p> + + Prints the box most recently saved in <tt>cmd by</tt> a +<a href="ltx-307.html"><tt>\savebox</tt> or <tt>\sbox</tt></a> command. +<p> + The <tt>\usebox</tt> command is <a href="fragile.html">robust</a>. +<hr> +See <a href="ltx-143.html">Spaces and Boxes</a><br> +See <a href="ltx-277.html"><tt>\newsavebox</tt></a>, + <a href="ltx-307.html"><tt>\savebox</tt></a><br> +Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 8 Aug 1995. +</address> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-338.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-338.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..64db37f4f6b --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-338.html @@ -0,0 +1,22 @@ +<html> +<head><title>Help On LaTeX \usecounter</title></head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\usecounter</font></h1> +<p> + <tt>\usecounter{counter}</tt> +<p> + + The <tt>\usecounter</tt> command is used in the second argument of the + <a href="ltx-260.html">list environment</a> + to allow the counter specified to be used to number the + list items. +<hr> +See also <A href="ltx-3.html">Counters</A>, + <a href="ltx-260.html">list environment</a><br> +Go to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 18 May 1995. +</address> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-339.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-339.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..a1c52a55300 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-339.html @@ -0,0 +1,27 @@ +<html> +<head><title>Help On LaTeX \value</title></head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\value</font></h1> +<p> + <tt>\value{counter}</tt> +<p> + + The <tt>\value</tt> command produces the value of the counter named in the + mandatory argument. It can be used where LaTeX expects an integer or + number, such as the second argument of a + <a href="ltx-310.html"><tt>\setcounter</tt></a> or + <a href="ltx-195.html"><tt>\addtocounter</tt></a> command, or in +<pre> + <tt>\hspace{\value{foo}<a href="ltx-86.html#lencmd">\parindent}</a></tt> +</pre> + It is useful for doing arithmetic with counters. +<hr> +See also <A href="ltx-3.html">Counters</A>, + <a href="ltx-86.html">Lengths</a><br> +Go to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 9 May 1995. +</address> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-340.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-340.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..0f32746eb98 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-340.html @@ -0,0 +1,25 @@ +<html> +<head><title>Help On LaTeX \vdots</title> +</head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\vdots</font></h1> + The <tt>\vdots</tt> command produces a vertical ellipsis.<br> + Can be used only in math mode. +<hr> +See also: +<ul> +<li><A href="ltx-207.html">\cdots</A> +<li><A href="ltx-218.html">\ddots</A> +<li><A href="ltx-256.html">\ldots</A> +<li><A href="ltx-340.html">\vdots</A> +<p> +<li><A href="ltx-115.html">Math Formulas</A>, +<li><A href="ltx-119.html">Math Miscellany</A>. +</ul> +Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 25 April 1995. +</address> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-341.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-341.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..93240e1509c --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-341.html @@ -0,0 +1,31 @@ +<html> +<head><title>Help On LaTeX \vector</title></head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\vector</font></h1> +<p> + <tt>\vector(x-slope,y-slope){length}</tt> +<p> + The <tt>\vector</tt> command draws an arrow of the specified length and slope + with the arrow head at the opposite end of the line from the + reference point (see <a href="ltx-296.html"><tt>\put</tt></a>). +<p> +The slope is determined by <tt>(x-slope,y-slope)</tt> which are signed +integers of magnitude less than or equal to 4 and which have no common +divisor except for plus or minus one; For example (1,0) is a horizontal +arrow pointing right; (1,1) gives a slope of +45 degress; (0,1) is a vertical arrow pointing up; (-1,1) is at 135 degrees. +<p> +The <strong>horizontal</strong> extent of the arrow is given by the +<tt>length</tt> parameter, except in the case of a vertical arrow in +which case <tt>length</tt> specifies the vertical height. +<hr> +See also <A href="ltx-27.html">Environments</A>, + <A href="ltx-43.html">picture</A><br> +See also <a href="ltx-257.html"><tt>\line</tt></a><br> +Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 12 May 1995. +</address> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-342.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-342.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..65cad2f1b0c --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-342.html @@ -0,0 +1,39 @@ +<html> +<head><title>Help On LaTeX \verb</title></head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\verb</font></h1> +<p> + <tt>\verb char literal_text char</tt><br> +or<br> + <tt>\verb*char literal_text char</tt><p> + + Typesets <tt>literal_text</tt> exactly as typed, + including special characters + and spaces, using a typewriter (<tt>\tt</tt>) font. There may be no + space between <tt>\verb</tt> or <tt>\verb*</tt> + and <tt>char</tt> (space is shown here only for + clarity). The *-form differs only in that spaces are printed + as "visual" spaces, i.e., a short, squat "u". +<p> + Any <tt>char</tt> except a space (or a <tt>*</tt> for the <tt>\verb</tt> + form) may be chosen as the delimiter. Thus, the input +<pre> + \verb1This!is?the##1 verbatim ... +</pre> +would produce<p> + +<tt>This!is?the##</tt> verbatim ... +<p> +The <tt>\verb</tt> command may <strong>not</strong> be used in the argument +of another command. For example, it cannot be used in the text of a +<a href="ltx-141.html">sectioning command</a>. +<hr> +See also <A href="ltx-27.html">Environments</A>, + <A href="ltx-79.html">verbatim</A><br> +Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 20 Oct 1995. +</address> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-345.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-345.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..7b0b0ec05e0 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-345.html @@ -0,0 +1,20 @@ +<html> +<head><title>Help On LaTeX \vfill</title></head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\vfill</font></h1> +<p> + The <tt>\vfill</tt> fill command produces a + <a href="ltx-86.html#rubber">rubber length</a> which can stretch or + shrink vertically. It is equivalent to a blank line followed by + <tt><a href="ltx-347.html">\vspace</a>\fill</tt>. It should be used only + in <a href="ltx-130.html">paragraph mode</a>. +<hr> +See <a href="ltx-143.html">Spaces and Boxes</a>, + <a href="ltx-86.html">Lengths</a><br> +Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 23 Oct 1995. +</address> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-346.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-346.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..6e3bc2ba17e --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-346.html @@ -0,0 +1,17 @@ +<html> +<head><title>Help On LaTeX \vline</title></head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\vline</font></h1> + The <tt>\vline</tt> command will draw a vertical line extending the full height + and depth of its row. An <tt><a href="ltx-238.html">\hfill</a></tt> command + can be used to move the line + to the edge of the column. It can also be used in an @-expression. +<hr> +See also: <a href="ltx-202.html">array</a>, +<A href="ltx-68.html">tabular</A><br> +Return to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 31 May 1995. +</address> +</body></html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-347.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-347.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..d643dc901ba --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-347.html @@ -0,0 +1,29 @@ +<html> +<head><title>Help On LaTeX \vspace</title></head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\vspace</font></h1> +<p> + <tt>\vspace[*]{length}</tt> +<p> + + The <tt>\vspace</tt> command adds vertical space. The length of the space can + be expressed in any terms that LaTeX understands, i.e., points, + inches, etc. You can add negative as well as positive space with an + <tt>\vspace</tt> command. +<p> + If <tt>\vspace</tt> appears in the middle of a paragraph the space + is added after the line containing it. +<p> + LaTeX removes vertical space that comes at the end of a page. If you + don't want LaTeX to remove this space, include the optional * + argument. Then the space is never removed. +<hr> +See <a href="ltx-143.html">Spaces and Boxes</a>, + <a href="ltx-86.html">Lengths</a><br> +Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 14 May 1995. +</address> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-37.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-37.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..fe16097d0f2 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-37.html @@ -0,0 +1,24 @@ +<html> +<head><title>Help On LaTeX \raggedright</title> +</head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\raggedright</font></h1> + This <a href="declarations.html">declaration</a> + corresponds to the <a href="ltx-228.html">flushleft environment</a>. This + declaration can be used inside an environment such as quote or in a + parbox. +<p> + Unlike the flushleft environment, the <tt>\raggedright</tt> command does not + start a new paragraph; it simply changes how LaTeX formats paragraph + units. To affect a paragraph unit's format, the scope of the + declaration must contain the blank line or <tt>\end</tt> command (of an + environment like quote) that ends the paragraph unit. +<hr> +See also <a href="ltx-228.html">flushleft environment</a><br> +Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 27 Sep 1995. +</address> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-39.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-39.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..a9a1a1ca3c1 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-39.html @@ -0,0 +1,25 @@ +<html> +<head><title>Help On LaTeX \raggedleft</title> +</head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\raggedleft</font></h1> +<p> + This <a href="declarations.html">declaration</a> + corresponds to the <a href="ltx-229.html">flushright environment</a>. This + declaration can be used inside an environment such as quote or in a + parbox. +<p> + Unlike the flushright environment, the <tt>\raggedleft</tt> command does not + start a new paragraph; it simply changes how LaTeX formats paragraph + units. To affect a paragraph unit's format, the scope of the + declaration must contain the blank line or <tt>\end</tt> command (of an + environment like quote) that ends the paragraph unit. +<hr> +See also <a href="ltx-229.html">flushright environment</a><br> +Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 27 Sep 1995. +</address> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-401.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-401.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..3acd2e45614 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-401.html @@ -0,0 +1,96 @@ +<html> +<head> +<title>Accents</title> +</head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">Accents</font></h1> +The rules differ somewhat depending whether you are in +<a href="ltx-130.html">text mode</a>, <a href="ltx-115.html#math">math +mode</a>, or the <a href="ltx-58.html">tabbing environment</a> + +<h2>Text mode</h2> +The following accents may be placed on letters. Although "o" is used in +most of the example, the accents may be placed on any letter. +Accents may even be placed above a "missing" letter; for example, +<tt>\~{}</tt> produces a tilde over a blank space. +<p> +The following commands may be used only in paragraph or LR mode.<br> +<ul> +<li><tt>\`{o}</tt> produces a grave accent, ò +<li><tt>\'{o}</tt> produces an acute accent, ó +<li><tt>\^{o}</tt> produces a circumflex, ô +<li><tt>\"{o}</tt> produces an umlaut or dieresis, ö +<li><tt>\H{o}</tt> produces a long Hungarian umlaut +<li><tt>\~{o}</tt> produces a tilde, õ +<li><tt>\c{c}</tt> produces a cedilla, ç +<li><tt>\={o}</tt> produces a macron accent (a bar over the letter) +<li><tt>\b{o}</tt> produces a bar under the letter +<li><tt>\.{o}</tt> produces a dot over the letter +<li><tt>\d{o}</tt> produces a dot under the letter +<li><tt>\u{o}</tt> produces a breve over the letter +<li><tt>\v{o}</tt> produces a "v" over the letter +<li><tt>\t{oo}</tt> produces a "tie" (inverted u) over the two letters +</ul> +<p> +Note that the letters "i" and "j" require special treatment when +they are given accents because it is often desirable to replace the +dot with the accent. For this purpose, the commands <tt>\i</tt> and +<tt>\j</tt> can be used to produce dotless letters.<p> +For example, +<ul> +<li><tt>\^{\i}</tt> should be used for i, circumflex, î +<li><tt>\"{\i}</tt> should be used for i, umlaut, ï +</ul> + +<h2><a name="math">Math mode</a></h2> +Several of the above and some similar accents can also be +produced in math mode. The following commands may be used <strong>only</strong> +in math mode. +<ul> +<li><tt>\hat{o}</tt> is similar to the circumflex (cf. <tt>\^</tt>) +<li><tt>\widehat{oo}</tt> is a wide version of <tt>\hat</tt> over several letters +<li><tt>\check{o}</tt> is a vee or check (cf. <tt>\v</tt>) +<li><tt>\tilde{o}</tt> is a tilde (cf. <tt>\~</tt>) +<li><tt>\widetilde{oo}</tt> is a wide version + of <tt>\tilde</tt> over several letters +<li><tt>\acute{o}</tt> is an acute accent (cf. <tt>\`</tt>) +<li><tt>\grave{o}</tt> is a grave accent (cf. <tt>\'</tt>) +<li><tt>\dot{o}</tt> is a dot over the letter (cf. <tt>\.</tt>) +<li><tt>\ddot{o}</tt> is a double dot over the letter +<li><tt>\breve{o}</tt> is a breve (cf. <tt>\u</tt>) +<li><tt>\bar{o}</tt> is a macron (cf. <tt>\=</tt>) +<li><tt>\vec{o}</tt> is a vector (arrow) over the letter +</ul> + +<h2><a href="ltx-58.html">Tabbing environment</a></h2> +Some of the accent marks used in running text have other uses in +the <a href="ltx-58.html">tabbing environment</a>. In that +case they can be created with the following command: +<ul> +<li><tt>\a'</tt> for an acute accent +<li><tt>\a`</tt> for a grave accent +<li><tt>\a=</tt> for a macron accent +</ul> +<hr> +Related topics: +<ul> +<li><a href="ltx-405.html">Greek letters</a> +<li><a href="ltx-402.html">Ligatures and Non-English symbols</a> +<li><a href="ltx-407.html">Miscellaneous symbols</a> +<p> +<li><a href="ltx-287.html"><tt>\overbrace</tt></a> +<li><a href="ltx-288.html"><tt>\overline</tt></a> +<p> +<li><a href="ltx-115.html#math">Math environment</a> +<li><a href="ltx-115.html">Math Formulas</a> and + <a href="ltx-117.html">Math Symbols</a> +<li><a href="ltx-408.html">Variable size symbols</a> +</ul> +Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 20 Oct 1995. +</address> +</body> +</html> + diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-402.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-402.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..500c3d7b99a --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-402.html @@ -0,0 +1,41 @@ +<html> +<head> +<title>Non-English characters and ligatures</title> +</head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">Non-English characters and ligatures</font></h1> + +These commands may be used only in paragraph or LR mode.<br> +<ul> +<li><tt>\ae</tt> small ae ligature (diphthong), æ +<li><tt>\AE</tt> capital ae ligature, Æ +<li><tt>\oe</tt> small oe ligature +<li><tt>\OE</tt> capital OE ligature +<li><tt>\aa</tt> small a, ring, å +<li><tt>\AA</tt> capital A, ring, Å +<li><tt>\o</tt> small o, slash, ø +<li><tt>\O</tt> capital O, slash, Ø +<li><tt>\ss</tt> German sz ligature, ß +</ul> +<p> +<h2>Non-English punctuation</h2> +An inverted "question mark" is made by <tt>?`</tt>. It will also be +generated by a <tt>></tt> in text mode. +<p> +An inverted "exclamation point" is made by <tt>!`</tt>. It will also be +generated by a <tt><</tt> in text mode. +<hr> +Related topics: +<ul> +<li> <a href="ltx-401.html">Accents</a>, +<li> <a href="ltx-405.html">Greek letters</a> +<li> <a href="ltx-407.html">Miscellaneous symbols</a> +</ul> +Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 5 Jun 1995. +</address> +</body> +</html> + diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-403.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-403.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..0f74a6048f1 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-403.html @@ -0,0 +1,116 @@ +<html> +<head> +<title>Delimiters</title> +</head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">Delimiters</font></h1> +Delimiters are objects which act logically like parentheses. These can +be used only in math mode. +<p> +The delimiters recognized by LaTeX include +<ul> +<li><tt>(</tt> (left parenthesis) +<li><tt>)</tt> (right parenthesis) +<li><tt>[</tt> (left bracket) +<li><tt>]</tt> (right bracket) +<li><tt>\{</tt> (left brace) +<li><tt>\}</tt> (right brace) +<li><tt>|</tt> (vertical line) +<li><tt>\vert</tt> (vertical line) +<li><tt>\|</tt> (double vertical lines) +<li><tt>\Vert</tt> (double vertical lines) +<li><tt>/</tt> (slash) +<li><tt><a href="ltx-164.html">\backslash</a></tt> (backslash) +<li><tt>\langle</tt> (left angle bracket) +<li><tt>\rangle</tt> (right angle bracket) +<li><tt>\uparrow</tt> (uparrow) +<li><tt>\downarrow</tt> (down arrow) +<li><tt>\updownarrow</tt> (up/down arrow) +</ul> + +<h2><a name="big">Making delimiters the right size</a></h2> +Delimiters in formulas should be big enough to "fit" around the formulas +they delimit (for example arround arrays). +To obtain "stretchable" delimiters (LaTeX makes them the +appropriate size) type a <tt>\left</tt> or <tt>\right</tt> command before +the delimiter. <tt>\left</tt> and <tt>\right</tt> commands must come in +matching pairs, although the delimiters themselves need not be the same. +Thus, <pre> \left \{ ... \right \[ </pre> produces a legal pair. +In cases where only one delimiter is desired, it +is possible to make the matching delimiter "invisible" by typing a +period (<tt>.</tt>) after the command, i.e., +<tt>\left.</tt> or <tt>\right.</tt>. +<p> +In an <a href="ltx-223.html">eqnarray environment</a> the matching <tt>\left</tt> +and <tt>\right</tt> cannot be split between lines and it may be necessary to +use an "invisible" <tt>\right.</tt> and <tt>\left.</tt> to terminate and +begin parts on different lines. In this case a second problem may arise, +since the size of the delimiters will be chosen only for the +<strong>local part</strong>, so that the size of the <strong>visible</strong> +"left" and "right" delimiters might not match. +The solution is to trick LaTeX into thinking +that both parts have the same vertical height. This can be done by placing +a strut, that is a zero-width <a href="ltx-306.html"><tt>\rule</tt></a>. It +can also be accomplished with the <tt>\vphantom</tt> command, which I have +not found documented, but which appears to work. +<p> +<pre><tt>\vphantom{construct}</tt></pre> +creates a zero-width object with the height of <tt>construct</tt>. The +argument can contain things such as <a href="ltx-235.html"><tt>\frac</tt></a> +or the <a href="ltx-408.html">variable size math symbols</a> and should +be chosen according to what is in the section with the delimiter you want to match. + +<h2>Some examples</h2> +<h3>A six-j symbol</h3> +<pre> + <tt>\[ \left<a href="ltx-164.html">\{</a> + \begin{<a href="ltx-202.html">array</a>}{ccc} + a & b & c <a href="ltx-181.html">\\</a> + d & e & f \end{array} + \right<a href="ltx-164.html">\}</a> \]</tt> +</pre> +This should be displayed something like (insofar as it can be rendered in +"ascii art"): +<pre> + ( a b c ) + - - + ( d e f ) +</pre> +Note that the <tt>\[ ... \]</tt> set this off as <a href="ltx-421.html"> +Display Math</a>, and that the <a href="ltx-202.html">Array Environment</a> +is used to generate the three centered columns inside the braces. +<h3>A "multiple choice" equation</h3> +<pre> + <tt>\[ f(x) = + \left\{ \begin{array}{l} + 0, x < 0 \\ 1, x = 0 \\ + 2, x > 0 \end{array} \right. \]</tt> +</pre> +will be displayed as +<pre> +<tt> ( 0, x < 0 + f(x) = - 1, x = 0 + ( 2, x > 0</tt> +</pre> +Note that the "invisible" <tt>\right</tt> delimiter is specified using +a "period". +<hr> +See also: +See also <a href="ltx-115.html">Math Formulas</a>, + <a href="ltx-117.html">Math Symbols</a> +<ul> +<li><a href="ltx-404.html">Binary and relational operators</a> +<li><a href="ltx-115.html">Math formulas</a>, +<li><a href="ltx-202.html">Arrays</a> +<li><a href="ltx-406.html">Arrows</a> +<li><a href="ltx-408.html">Variable size symbols (sums, integrals, etc.)</a> +</ul> +<hr> +Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 28 Nov 1995. +</address> +</body> +</html> + diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-404.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-404.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..9016b0b2018 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-404.html @@ -0,0 +1,75 @@ +<html> +<head> +<title>Binary and relational opertors</title> +</head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">Binary and relational operators</font></h1> +Some "math" symbols are obtained by typing the corresponding keyboard +character. Examples include +<pre> + - = < > </pre> +<strong>Note:</strong> plus, minus, and equal sign may be used in +either text or math mode, but < and > are math mode only +(they produce inverted exclamation and question marks, respectively, +in text mode). +<p> +The following commands may be used only in math mode. + +<ul> +<li><tt>\pm</tt> plus or minus sign +<li><tt>\mp</tt> minus or plus sign +<li><tt>\times</tt> times (an "x") +<li><tt>\div</tt> divided by sign +<li><tt>\ast</tt> an asterisk (centered) +<li><tt>\star</tt> a five-point star (centered) +<li><tt>\bullet</tt> a bullet +<li><tt>\circ</tt> an open bullet +<li><tt>\cdot</tt> a centered dot (see also, + <a href="ltx-207.html"><tt>\cdots</tt></a>) +<p> +<li><tt>\leq</tt> less than or equal to +<li><tt>\ll</tt> much less than +<li><tt>\subset</tt> is a subset of +<li><tt>\geq</tt> greater than or equal to +<li><tt>\gg</tt> much greater than +<li><tt>\equiv</tt> equivalence symbol +<li><tt>\sim</tt> similar to +<li><tt>\simeq</tt> similar or equal to +<li><tt>\approx</tt> approximately equal to +<li><tt>\neq</tt> not equal to +<li><tt>\per</tt> "perpendicular to" symbols +<li><tt>\propto</tt> proportional to +</ul> +<p> +Note that "greater than" and "less than" are obtained simply by +entering <tt>></tt> and <tt><</tt>. +<p> +A slash, indicating <a name=not>"not"</a> can be placed through a symbol +(or a letter) with the <tt>\not</tt> command. For example, not less than is +<pre> \not< +</pre> +and not less than or equal to is +<pre> \not\leq +</pre> +If the slash isn't properly positioned it can be moved by putting a +<a href="ltx-118.html">math mode spacing command</a> between the <tt>\not</tt> +and the symbol. +<p> +Related topics: +<ul> +<li><a href="ltx-406.html">Arrows</a> +<li><a href="ltx-403.html">Delimiters</a> +<li><a href="ltx-405.html">Greek letters</a> +<li><a href="ltx-407.html">Miscellaneous symbols</a> +<li><a href="ltx-408.html">Variable size symbols</a> (sums, integrals, etc.) +</ul> +<hr> +See also <a href="ltx-115.html">Math Formulas</a>, + <a href="ltx-117.html">Math Symbols</a><br> +Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 7Jul 1995. +</address> +</body> +</html> + diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-405.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-405.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..2d7bda376e4 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-405.html @@ -0,0 +1,72 @@ +<html> +<head> +<title>Greek letters</title> +</head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">Greek letters</font></h1> + +These commands may be used only in math mode. +<h2>Lower case</h2> +<ul> +<li><tt>\alpha</tt> +<li><tt>\beta</tt> +<li><tt>\gamma</tt> +<li><tt>\delta</tt> +<li><tt>\epsilon</tt> +<li><tt>\varepsilon</tt> (variation, script-like) +<li><tt>\zeta</tt> +<li><tt>\eta</tt> +<li><tt>\theta</tt> +<li><tt>\vartheta</tt> (variation, script-like) +<li><tt>\iota</tt> +<li><tt>\kappa</tt> +<li><tt>\lambda</tt> +<li><tt>\mu</tt> +<li><tt>\nu</tt> +<li><tt>\xi</tt> +<li><tt>\pi</tt> +<li><tt>\varpi</tt> (variation) +<li><tt>\rho</tt> +<li><tt>\varrho</tt> (variation, with the tail) +<li><tt>\sigma</tt> +<li><tt>\varsigma</tt> (variation, script-like) +<li><tt>\tau</tt> +<li><tt>\upsilon</tt> +<li><tt>\phi</tt> +<li><tt>\varphi</tt> (variation, script-like) +<li><tt>\chi</tt> +<li><tt>\psi</tt> +<li><tt>\omega</tt> +</ul> +<h2>Capital letters</h2> +<ul> +<li><tt>\Gamma</tt> +<li><tt>\Delta</tt> +<li><tt>\Theta</tt> +<li><tt>\Lambda</tt> +<li><tt>\Xi</tt> +<li><tt>\Pi</tt> +<li><tt>\Sigma</tt> +<li><tt>\Upsilon</tt> +<li><tt>\Phi</tt> +<li><tt>\Psi</tt> +<li><tt>\Omega</tt> +</ul> +<hr> +See also: +See also <a href="ltx-115.html">Math Formulas</a>, + <a href="ltx-117.html">Math Symbols</a> +<ul> +<li><a href="ltx-401.html">Accents</a> +<li><a href="ltx-402.html">Ligatures and Non-English symbols</a> +<li><a href="ltx-407.html">Miscellaneous symbols</a> +<li><a href="mathfonts.html">Math fonts and styles</a> +</ul> +Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 7 Jul 1995. +</address> +</body> +</html> + diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-406.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-406.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..24c60007829 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-406.html @@ -0,0 +1,58 @@ +<html> +<head> +<title>Arrows</title> +</head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">Arrows</font></h1> +Latex provides commands for all sorts of arrows. The following commands +are used only in math mode. +<p> +In general the command names are created from "left", "right", "up", or +"down". "leftright" gives a double headed arrow. +Prefacing with "long" gives a longer arrow. Capitalizing the +first letter gives a double-shanked arrow. +<p> +Examples are +<ul> +<li><tt>\leftarrow</tt> +<li><tt>\Leftarrow</tt> +<li><tt>\longleftarrow</tt> +<li><tt>\Longleftarrow</tt> +<p> +<li><tt>\rightarrow</tt> +<li><tt>\Rightarrow</tt> +<li><tt>\longrightarrow</tt> +<li><tt>\Longrightarrow</tt> +<p> +<li><tt>\leftrightarrow</tt> +<li><tt>\Leftrightarrow</tt> +<li><tt>\longleftrightarrow</tt> +<p> +<li><tt>\uparrow</tt> +<li><tt>\downarrow</tt> +<li><tt>\Uparrow</tt> +<p> +<li><tt>\nearrow</tt> points from southwest to northeast +<li><tt>\searrow</tt> points from northwest to southeast +<li><tt>\swarrow</tt> points from northeast to southwest +<li><tt>\nwarrow</tt> points from southeast to northwest +</ul> +The <a href="stackrel.html"><tt>\stackrel</tt></a> command is +useful for putting things over or under your arrow. +<hr> +See also: +See also <a href="ltx-115.html">Math Formulas</a>, + <a href="ltx-117.html">Math Symbols</a> +<ul> +<li><a href="ltx-404.html">Binary and relational operators</a> +<li><a href="ltx-405.html">Greek letters</a> +<li><a href="ltx-407.html">Miscellaneous symbols</a> +<li><a href="ltx-408.html">Variable size symbols</a> (sums, integrals, etc.) +</ul> +Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 7 Jull 1995. +</address> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-407.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-407.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..e2340140b50 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-407.html @@ -0,0 +1,90 @@ +<html> +<head> +<title>Miscellaneous symbols</title> +</head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">Miscellaneous symbols</font></h1> + +<h2>Some symbols for math</h2> +The following symbols are also used only in math mode +<ul> +<li><tt>\aleph</tt> Hebrew aleph +<li><tt>\hbar</tt> h-bar, Planck's constant +<li><tt>\imath</tt> variation on "i"; no dot +<ul><li>See also <a href="ltx-401.html"><tt>\i</tt></a></ul> +<li><tt>\jmath</tt> variation on "j"; no dot +<ul><li>See also <a href="ltx-401.html"><tt>\j</tt></a></ul> +<li><tt>\ell</tt> script (loop) "l" +<li><tt>\wp</tt> fancy script lowercase "P" +<li><tt>\Re</tt> script capital "R" ("Real") +<li><tt>\Im</tt> script capital "I" ("Imaginary") +<li><tt>\prime</tt> prime (also obtained by typing <tt>'</tt>) +<li><tt>\nabla</tt> inverted capital Delta +<li><tt>\surd</tt> radical (square root) symbol +<li><tt>\angle</tt> angle symbol +<li><tt>\forall</tt> "for all" (inverted A) +<li><tt>\exists</tt> "exists" (left-facing E) +<li><a href="ltx-164.html"><tt>\backslash</tt></a> backslash +<li><tt>\partial</tt> partial derivative symbol +<li><tt>\infty</tt> infinity symbol +<li><tt>\triangle</tt> open triangle symbol +<li><tt>\Box</tt> open square +<li><tt>\Diamond</tt> open diamond +<p> +<li><tt>\flat</tt> music: flat symbol +<li><tt>\natural</tt> music: natural symbol +<li><tt>\sharp</tt> music: sharp symbol +<p> +<li><tt>\clubsuit</tt> playing cards: club suit symbol +<li><tt>\diamondsuit</tt> playing cards: diamond suit symbol +<li><tt>\heartsuit</tt> playing cards: heart suit symbol +<li><tt>\spadesuit</tt> playing cards: space suit symbol +</ul> + +<h2>Some other symbols</h2> +The following symbols can be used in any mode. +<ul> +<li><tt>\dag</tt> dagger +<li><tt>\ddag</tt> double dagger +<li><tt>\S</tt> section symbol +<li><tt>\P</tt> paragraph symbol +<li><tt>\copyright</tt> copyright symbol +<li><tt>\pounds</tt> British pound sterling symbol +</ul> + +<h2>Calligraphic style letters</h2> +Twenty-six calligraphic letters are provided (the upper case alphabet). These +can only be used in math mode.<p> +In LaTeX 2.09 they are produced with the <tt>\cal</tt> +<a href="declarations.html">declaration</a> +<pre> + <tt>${\cal A}$</tt> +</pre> + + In LaTeX2e they are obtained with the <tt>\mathcal</tt> command: +<pre> + <tt>$\mathcal{CAL}$</tt> +</pre> +<hr> +See also: +See also <a href="ltx-115.html">Math Formulas</a>, + <a href="ltx-117.html">Math Symbols</a>, + <a href="ltx-119.html">Math Miscellany</a> +<ul> +<li><a href="ltx-406.html">Arrows</a> +<li><a href="ltx-403.html">Delimiters</a> +<li><a href="ltx-404.html">Binary and relational operators</a> +<li><a href="ltx-405.html">Greek letters</a> +<li><a href="ltx-408.html">Variable size symbols</a> (sums, integrals, etc.) +<li><a href="mathfonts.html">Math fonts and styles</a> +<p> +<li><a href="stackrel.html"><tt>\stackrel</tt></a> (putting things above + other things) +</ul> +Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 7 Jul 1995. +</address> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-408.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-408.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..ede35a461ac --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-408.html @@ -0,0 +1,79 @@ +<html> +<head> +<title>Variable size symbols</title> +</head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">Variable size symbols</font></h1> +The size of some mathematical symbols, notably summation signs, product signs, and +integral signs, depends on the environment in which they +appear (i.e., <tt>displaymath</tt> as opposed to <tt>math</tt> environments; +see <a href="ltx-115.html">Math Formulas</a> and +<a href="mathfonts.html">Math Fonts and Styles</a>). +<p> +These include +<ul> +<li><tt>\sum</tt> a summation sign (capital sigma) +<li><tt>\prod</tt> a product (capital pi) +<li><tt>\coprod</tt> a coproduct (inverted capital pi) +<li><tt>\int</tt> an integral sign +<li><tt>\oint</tt> a surface (circular) integral sign +<li><tt>\bigcup</tt> big "U" +<li><tt>\bigcap</tt> big inverted "U" +<li><tt>\bigvee</tt> big "V" +<li><tt>\bigwedge</tt> big inverted "V" +<li><tt>\bigodot</tt> big "O" with dot at center +<li><tt>\bigotimes</tt> big "O" with cross inside +<li><tt>\bigoplus</tt> big "O" with a + inside +<li><tt>\biguplus</tt> big "U" with a + inside +</ul> +The <a href="ltx-319.html"><tt>\sqrt</tt></a> command also produces a variable +size symbol appropriate for the size of hte radicand argument. +<p> +<p> +The "limits" associated with these symbols are entered as +<a href="ltx-179.html">subscripts</a> for entries appearing below the +symbol and as <a href="ltx-180.html">superscripts</a> for entries appearing +above the symbol. +For example the sum from n=0 to infinity of x<sub>n</sub> would be entered as +<pre> + \sum_{n=0}^{<a href="ltx-407.html">\infty</a>} x_{n} +</pre> +The actual placement of the limits depends on whether this +is in <tt>displaymath</tt> mode in which case they are placed below/above +or in <tt>math</tt> mode in running text in which case they are placed as regular +subscripts and superscripts. +<p> +Note that it is possible to treat several of these symbols (a common example +would be a double sum) as a single symbol for placing limits above and/or +below by using the <a href="stackrel.html#mathop"><tt>\mathop</tt></a> command. +<p> +"Hats" and "tildes" over symbols which stretch (as best they can) to +the correct size for their arguments are produced by +<a href="ltx-401.html#math"><tt>\widehat</tt> and <tt>\widetilde</tt></a>. +<hr> +Related topics: +<ul> +<li><a href="ltx-403.html">Delimiters</a> can be made variable sized +<li><a href="mathfonts.html">Math fonts and styles</a> +<p> +<li><a href="ltx-115.html">Math Formulas</a> +<li><a href="ltx-117.html">Math Symbols</a> +<li><a href="ltx-119.html">Math Miscellany</a> +<li><a href="ltx-406.html">Arrows</a> +<li><a href="ltx-404.html">Binary and relational operators</a> +<li><a href="ltx-409.html">Math function symbols</a> +<li><a href="ltx-407.html">Miscellaneous symbols</a> +<p> +<li><a href="ltx-403.html#big"><tt>\left</tt></a> +<li><a href="ltx-403.html#big"><tt>\right</tt></a> +<li><a href="ltx-319.html"><tt>\sqrt</tt></a> +<li><a href="stackrel.html"><tt>\stackrel</tt> and <tt>\mathop</tt></a> +</ul> +Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 28 Nov 1995. +</address> +</body> +</html> + diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-409.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-409.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..468ee7918d0 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-409.html @@ -0,0 +1,76 @@ +<html> +<head> +<title>Math function symbols</title> +</head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">Math function symbols</font></h1> +Functions like "log" or "cos" are normally used in math mode. However, in +math mode strings of letters are treated as a product of variables, which +would normally be displayed in math italics rather than a text font which +would be appropriate for these functions. To +get proper display of such functions they are generated with LaTeX commands. +<p> +Some of these commands are +<ul> +<li><tt>\arccos</tt> +<li><tt>\arcsin</tt> +<li><tt>\arctan</tt> +<li><tt>\cos</tt> +<li><tt>\cosh</tt> +<li><tt>\cot</tt> +<li><tt>\coth</tt> +<li><tt>\csc</tt> +<li><tt>\deg</tt> +<li><tt>\det</tt> +<li><tt>\dim</tt> +<li><tt>\exp</tt> +<li><tt>\gcd</tt> +<li><tt>\hom</tt> +<li><tt>\inf</tt> +<li><tt>\ker</tt> +<li><tt>\lg</tt> +<li><tt>\lim</tt> +<li><tt>\liminf</tt> +<li><tt>\limsup</tt> +<li><tt>\ln</tt> +<li><tt>\log</tt> +<li><tt>\max</tt> +<li><tt>\min</tt> +<li><tt>\sec</tt> +<li><tt>\sin</tt> +<li><tt>\sinh</tt> +<li><tt>\sup</tt> +<li><tt>\tan</tt> +<li><tt>\tanh</tt> +</ul> +Two commands are provided for the "modulus" function +<ul> +<li><tt>\bmod</tt> +<li><tt>\pmod{}</tt> +</ul> +The former would be used to write "a mod b" as +<pre> a \bmod b +</pre> +and the latter, which requires an argument that is displayed in parentheses, +would be used to write "n = i (mod j)" as +<pre> n = i \pmod{j} +</pre> + +<p> +Related topics: +<ul> +<li><a href="ltx-406.html">Arrows</a> +<li><a href="ltx-404.html">Binary and relational operators</a> +<li><a href="ltx-403.html">Delimiters</a> +<li><a href="ltx-407.html">Miscellaneous symbols</a> +<li><a href="ltx-408.html">Variable size symbols</a> +</ul> +<hr> +Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 25 April 1995. +</address> +</body> +</html> + diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-420.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-420.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..a2f26a22b28 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-420.html @@ -0,0 +1,26 @@ +<html> +<head><title>Help On LaTeX Abstract Environment</title></head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">Abstract environment</font></h1> +In the article or report <a href="ltx-22.html">document style</a>, the +abstract is produced by the abstract environment: +<pre> + <tt>\begin{abstract} + Abstract text, set in the usual + LaTeX paragraph mode. + + An empy line, for example, specifies + a new paragraph + \end{abstract}</tt> +</pre> +The abstract is typically set with a narrower page margin. + +<hr> +See also <a href="ltx-27.html">LaTeX environments</a><br> +Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 8 May 1995. +</address> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-421.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-421.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..8f92d8e2580 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-421.html @@ -0,0 +1,54 @@ +<html> +<head><title>Help On LaTeX Displaymath</title></head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">Displaymath</font></h1> + + There are four environments that put LaTeX in math mode: + <a href="ltx-115.html#math">math</a>, + displaymath, <a href="ltx-223.html">eqnarray</a>, + and <a href="ltx-224.html">equation</a>. + The math environment is for formulas that + appear right in the text. The displaymath and equation environments are + for formulas that appear on their own line; they differ only insofar + as the latter prints an equation number. LaTeX will <strong>not</strong> + break lines in displaymath or equation environments unless told to do + so with a <a href="ltx-181.html"><tt>\\</tt></a> command. +<p> + The displaymath environment can be entered by +<pre> + <tt>\begin{displaymath} + math equation \\ + second line of math equation + \end{displaymath}</tt> +</pre> +Because displaymath may be used frequently to display relatively +short equations, there are convenient alternative forms: +<pre> + <tt>\[ displayed math equation \]</tt> +</pre> +or (the following does not seem to be well documented, but appears to work) +<pre> + <tt>$$ dispalyed math equation $$</tt> +</pre> +<hr> +Related topics +<ul> +<li><a href="ltx-115.html#math">Math environment</a> +<li><a href="ltx-223.html">Eqnarray environment</a> +<li><a href="ltx-224.html">Equation environment</a> +<p> +<li><a href="ltx-130.html">LaTeX Modes</a> +<p> +<li><A href="ltx-117.html">Math Symbols</A> +<li><A href="ltx-179.html">Subscripts</A> and + <a href="ltx-180.html">Superscripts</a> +<li><A href="ltx-118.html">Spacing in Math Mode</A> +<li><A href="ltx-119.html">Math Miscellany</A> +</ul> +Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 5 Jun 1995. +</address> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-43.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-43.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..61de1ff618a --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-43.html @@ -0,0 +1,107 @@ +<html> +<head><title>Help On LaTeX picture</title></head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">Picture environment</font></h1> +<p> +<p><pre> + \begin{picture}(width,height)(x-offset,y-offset) + ... + picture commands + ... + \end{picture} +</pre> +<p> + The picture environment allows you to create just about any kind of + picture you want containing text, lines, arrows and circles. You tell + LaTeX where to put things in the picture by specifying their + coordinates. A coordinate is a number that may have a decimal point + and a minus sign (<tt>-</tt>), for example, 5, 2.3, or -3.1416. A coordinate + specifies a length in multiples of the unit length + <a href="unitlength.html"><tt>\unitlength</tt></a>, so if + <tt>\unitlength</tt> has been set to 1cm, then the coordinate 2.54 specifies a + length of 2.54 centimeters. You can change the value of <tt>\unitlength</tt> + anywhere you want, using the + <a href="ltx-88.html"><tt>\setlength</tt></a> command, + but it should be set before the beginning of the picture environment since + strange things may happen if you try changing it inside the picture environment. +<p> + A position is a pair of coordinates, such as (2.4,-5), specifying the + point with x-coordinate = 2.4 and y-coordinate = -5. Coordinates are + specified in the usual way with respect to an origin, which is + normally at the lower-left corner of the picture. Note that when a + position appears as an argument, it is not enclosed in braces; the + parentheses serve to delimit the argument. +<p> + The picture environment has one mandatory argument, which + specifies the size of the picture. The environment + produces a rectangular box with width and height determined by this + argument's two values. +<p> + The picture environment also has an optional position argument, + following the size argument, that can change the origin. (Unlike + ordinary optional arguments, this argument is not contained in square + brackets.) The optional argument gives the coordinates of the point at + the lower-left corner of the picture (thereby determining the origin). + For example, if + <a href="unitlength.html"><tt>\unitlength</tt></a> has been set to 1mm, + the command +<p> +<p><pre> + \begin{picture}(100,200)(10,20) +</pre> + produces a picture of width 100 millimeters and height 200 + millimeters, whose lower-left corner is the point (10,20) and whose + upper-right corner is therefore the point (110,220). + Typically one initially omits the optional argument, leaving the + origin at the lower-left corner. If you then want to modify your + picture by shifting everything, you just add the appropriate optional + argument. +<p> + The environment's mandatory argument determines the nominal size of + the picture. This need bear no relation to how large the picture + really is; LaTeX will happily allow you to put things outside the + picture, or even off the page. The picture's nominal size is used by + TeX in determining how much room to leave for it. +<p> + Everything that appears in a picture is drawn by the + <a href="ltx-296.html"><tt>\put</tt></a> command. The + command +<pre> + \put (11.3,-.3){obj} +</pre> + puts the object specified by <tt>obj</tt> in the picture, with its reference + point at coordinates (11.3,-.3). The reference points for various + objects will be described below. +<p> + The <a href="ltx-296.html"><tt>\put</tt></a> + command creates an LR box. You can put anything in the text + argument of the <tt>\put</tt> command that you'd put into the argument + of an <a href="ltx-265.html"><tt>\mbox</tt></a> + (or related) command. When you do this, the reference point + will be the lower left corner of the box. +<p> +See also +<ul> +<li><A href="ltx-210.html"><tt>\circle</tt></A> +<li><A href="ltx-216.html"><tt>\dashbox</tt></A> +<li><A href="ltx-236.html"><tt>\frame</tt></A> +<li><A href="ltx-237.html"><tt>\framebox</tt></A> +<li><A href="ltx-257.html"><tt>\line</tt></A> +<li><A href="ltx-259.html"><tt>\linethickness</tt></A> +<li><A href="ltx-262.html"><tt>\makebox</tt></A> +<li><A href="ltx-269.html"><tt>\multiput</tt></A> +<li><A href="ltx-286.html"><tt>\oval</tt></A> +<li><A href="ltx-296.html"><tt>\put</tt></A> +<li><A href="ltx-314.html"><tt>\shortstack</tt></A> +<li><a href="unitlength.html"><tt>\unitlength</tt></a> +<li><A href="ltx-341.html"><tt>\vector</tt></A> +<p> +<li><a href="ltx-86.html">Lengths</a> +</ul> +Return to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 12 May 1995. +</address> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-430.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-430.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..6d7c78c1e97 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-430.html @@ -0,0 +1,25 @@ +<html> +<head> +<title>Help On LaTeX Dashes</title> +</head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">Dashes</font></h1> +LaTeX provides for three sizes of dashes which are indicated by +typing one, two, or three consecutive dashes in the text. +<ul> +<li>a hyphenation dash, as in X-ray, is a single dash +<li>a dash between limits, as in 1--2, is a double dash +<li>a parenthetical punctuation --- such as this --- is a triple dash +</ul> +Note that this applies to paragraph mode. In math mode each <tt>-</tt> +is interpreted as a minus sign. +<hr> +See also <a href="ltx-143.html">Spaces and boxes</a>, + <a href="ltx-130.html">Modes</a><br> +Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 11 May 1995. +</address> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-431.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-431.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..3dd0c9f8d0f --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-431.html @@ -0,0 +1,47 @@ +<html> +<head><title>Help On LaTeX \<space></title></head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\<space></font></h1> +LaTeX normally leaves a little extra space after sentences. However, it +uses a rather simple rule for determining whether a period ends a +sentence: it assumes that periods end sentences <em>unless</em> they +follow an upper case letter. To let LaTeX know that a period does +<em>not</em> end a sentence after, for example, an abbreviation, use: +<p> + <tt>\<space></tt> +<p> +For example, +<pre> + <tt>Jones, et al.\ (1993) ...</tt> +</pre> +Such a space may also be needed after a text-producing command, +such as one defined with <a href="ltx-18.html"><tt>\newcommand</tt></a>. +As an example, consider +<pre> + <tt>\newcommand{\water}{H$_2$O} + \water, \water\ everywhere, but not a drop ...</tt> +</pre> +The first <tt>\water</tt> command is terminated by the comma; +note that LaTeX does not leave a space between the first <tt>\water</tt> +and the comma -- as desired -- and the trailing space is treated as an +interword space. However, the second <tt>\water</tt> command +is terminated by the space, but LaTeX would not leave an extra space after +this, running "H<sub>2</sub>Owater" into one word, except for the +trailing <tt>\ </tt>. +<p> +An alternate way to indicate the end of a command so that a trailing +space is interpreted as an interword space is to use braces: +<pre> + <tt>\water, \water{} everywhere, ...</tt> +</pre> +<hr> +See <a href="ltx-432.html"><tt>\@.</tt></a> for the opposite case<br> +See also <A href="ltx-99.html">Line and Page Breaking</A>, + <a href="ltx-143.html">Spaces and Boxes</a><br> +Go to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 26 Jun 1995. +</address> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-432.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-432.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..325075dc2b7 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-432.html @@ -0,0 +1,27 @@ +<html> +<head><title>Help On LaTeX \@</title></head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\@</font></h1> +LaTeX normally leaves a little extra space after punctuation, such as the +period which ends a sentence. However, it +uses a rather simple rule for determining whether a period ends a +sentence: it assumes that periods end sentences <em>unless</em> they +follow an upper case letter. To tell LaTeX to insert extra space after +punctuation which follows an upper case letter, precede the punctuation +by <tt>\@</tt>. +<p> +For example: +<pre> + <tt>It is I\@.</tt> +</pre> +would not be considered to be a sentence by LaTeX except for the <tt>\@</tt>. +<hr> +See also <a href="ltx-431.html"><tt>\<space></tt></a> for the opposite case<br> +See also <A href="ltx-99.html">Line and Page Breaking</A><br> +Go to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 10 May 1995. +</address> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-433.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-433.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..69134f59518 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-433.html @@ -0,0 +1,26 @@ +<html> +<head> +<title>Help On Quotation Marks</title> +</head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">Quotation Marks</font></h1> +LaTeX distinguishes between left (<tt>`</tt>) and right (<tt>'</tt>) +quotation marks; the former corresponds to the "grave" generally found +to the left of the numbers at top of the keyboard, and the latter +corresponds to the usual single quote mark. +<p> +These symbols, by themselves, produce left and right single quotes. +<p> +Double quote are produced by typing two in a row: <tt>``text''</tt>. +<p> +To separate consecutive single and double quotes, use a +<a href="ltx-185.html"><tt>\,</tt></a>. +<hr> +See also <a href="ltx-143.html">Spaces and boxes</a><br> +Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 10 May 1995. +</address> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-434.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-434.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..3851d4499d9 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-434.html @@ -0,0 +1,30 @@ +<html> +<head> +<title>Help Comments in file</title> +</head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">Comments in file</font></h1> +You can insert comments into the LaTeX input (*.tex) file. Anything following +a percent sign (<tt>%</tt>) until the end of the line is ignored by the +LaTeX processor. +<p> +In fact, the <tt>%</tt> ends a line without generating a space; +an end-of-line in LaTeX input is normally equivalent to a space. +Thus, for example, it allows one to split a word +over lines without inserting a break. For example +<pre> + <tt> this is an extr% + ordinarily long word</tt> +</pre> +would produce "this is an extraordinarily long word" with no breaks. +However, a <strong>command</strong> cannot be split over lines this way. +<hr> +See also <a href="ltx-164.html">Special Characters</a>, +<a href="input.html">Input to LaTeX</a><br> +Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 1 Jun 1995. +</address> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-58.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-58.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..d5624173888 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-58.html @@ -0,0 +1,60 @@ +<html> +<head><title>Help On LaTeX tabbing</title></head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">tabbing</font></h1> +<p><pre> + \begin{tabbing} + text \= more text \= still more text \= last text \\ + second row \> \> more \\ + .... + .... + \end{tabbing} +</pre> + The tabbing environment provides a way to align text in columns. It + works by setting tab stops and tabbing to them much the way you do + with an ordinary typewriter. +<p> + The <a href="ltx-68.html">tabular</a> environment also aligns text in + columns, but there are several important differences. + <ul> + <li> The tabular environment can be used in any <a href="ltx-130.html">mode</a> + whereas the tabbing environment can be used only in paragraph + <a href="ltx-130.html">mode</a> and it starts a new paragraph. +<p> + <li>The tabular + environment generates a box, which LaTeX treats as one (albeit very large) + letter; it cannot be split across pages. A long tabbing environment can + be split across pages. +<p> + <li>The width of columns in a tabular environment is determined automatically + by LaTeX; in the tabbing environment this is done by setting tab stops. +</ul> +<H2>Tabbing commands</H2> +<ul> +<li><A href="ltx-187.html"><tt>\=</tt></A> (set tab) +<li><A href="ltx-188.html"><tt>\></tt></A> (advance to next tab stop) +<li><A href="ltx-189.html"><tt>\<</tt></A> +<li><A href="ltx-190.html"><tt>\+</tt></A> (indent; move margin right) +<li><A href="ltx-182.html"><tt>\-</tt></A> (unindent; move margin left) +<li><A href="ltx-191.html"><tt>\'</tt></A> +<li><A href="ltx-192.html"><tt>\`</tt></A> +<li><a href="ltx-181.html"><tt>\\</tt></a> (end of line; newline) +<li><A href="ltx-251.html"><tt>\kill</tt></A> (ignore preceding text; use only + for spacing) +</ul> +The <a href="ltx-241.html"><tt>\hspace</tt></a> command is useful for +controlling horizontal space in the tabbing environment. +<p> +Note that the commands <tt>\=</tt>, <tt>\'</tt>, and <tt>\`</tt> +normally produce <a href="ltx-401.html">accents</a> over the subsequent +letter. These commands are redefined in the tabbing environment; +in this environment it is possible to get the accents by using +<tt>\a=</tt>, <tt>\a'</tt>, and <tt>\a`</tt>, respectively. +</body> +<hr> +Return to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 28 Nov 1995. +</address> +</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-67.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-67.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..eb5e016f1b1 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-67.html @@ -0,0 +1,49 @@ +<html> +<head><title>Help On LaTeX table</title></head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">table</font></h1> +<p> +<p><pre> + \begin{table}[placement] + + body of the table + + <a href="caption.html">\caption{table title}</a> + \end{table} +</pre> +<p> + + Tables are objects that are not part of the normal text, and are + usually "floated" to a convenient place, like the top of a page. + Tables will not be split between two pages. +<p> + Note that there is an *-form: <tt>\begin{table*} ... \end{table*}</tt>. + This form will put the table in a single column when in two column mode; + in one column mode it is identical to the non-* form +<p> + The optional argument [placement] determines where LaTeX will try to + place your table. There are four places where LaTeX can possibly put + a float: +<ul> +<li><TT>h</TT> Here - at the position in the text where the table + environment appears. +<li><TT>t</TT> Top - at the top of a text page. +<li><TT>b</TT> Bottom - at the bottom of a text page. +<li><TT>p</TT> Page of floats - on a separate float page, which is a page + containing no text, only floats. +</ul> + The standard report and article styles use the default placement <tt>tbp</tt>. +<p> + The body of the table is made up of whatever text, LaTeX commands, + etc., you wish. +<p> + The <a href="caption.html"><tt>\caption</tt></a> command allows you to title your table. +<hr> + See also <a href="ltx-68.html">tabular environment</a><br> + Go to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 2 May 1995. +</address> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-68.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-68.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..3926aafd653 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-68.html @@ -0,0 +1,149 @@ +<html> +<head><title>Help On LaTeX tabular</title></head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">tabular</font></h1> +<pre> + \begin{tabular}[pos]{cols} + column 1 entry & column 2 entry ... & column n entry \\ + ... + ... + \end{tabular} +</pre> + +or + +<pre> + \begin{tabular*}{width}[pos]{cols} + column 1 entry & column 2 entry ... & column n entry \\ + ... + ... + \end{tabular*} +</pre> +Note that the *-form takes an additional <tt>width</tt> mandatory argument +which specifies the width of the tabular environment; in the regular form +the width is determined by LaTeX from the contents of the tabular environment. +<p> + These environments produce a box consisting of a sequence of rows of + items, aligned vertically in columns. The mandatory and optional + arguments consist of: +<ul> + <li><TT>cols</TT> Specifies the column formatting. It consists of a + sequence of the following specifiers, at least one for each + of the columns. + <ul> + <li><tt>l</tt> - A column of left-aligned items. + <li><tt>r</tt> - A column of right-aligned items. + <li><tt>c</tt> - A column of centered items. + <li><tt>p{wd}</tt> - Produces a column which can be multiple lines, + with each item typeset in a parbox + of width wd. It works as if each item were the argument of a + <a href="ltx-294.html"><tt>\parbox[t]{wd}</tt></a> + command. However, a + <a href="ltx-181.html"><tt>\\</tt></a> + may not appear in the item, except in + the following situations: (i) inside an environment like + minipage, array, or tabular, (ii) inside an explicit <tt>\parbox,</tt> + or (iii) in the scope of a + <a href="ltx-30.html"><tt>\centering</tt></a>, + <a href="ltx-300.html"><tt>\raggedleft</tt></a>, or + <a href="ltx-301.html"><tt>\raggedright</tt></a> + declaration. The latter declarations must appear + inside braces or an environment when used in a <tt>p</tt>-column + element. +<p> + <li><tt>|</tt> - A vertical line the full height and depth of the + environment. + <li><tt>@{text}</tt> - This inserts <tt>text</tt> in every row. + An @-expression + suppresses the intercolumn space normally inserted between + columns; any desired space between the inserted text and the + adjacent items must be included in <tt>text</tt>. + To force the spacing between two columns to be <tt>wdth</tt>, + use an <tt>@{\hspace{wdth}}</tt> between the column specifiers. + An <tt>\extracolsep{wd}</tt> + command in an @-expression causes an extra space of width <tt>wd</tt> + to appear to the left of all subsequent columns, until + countermanded by another <tt>\extracolsep</tt> command. Unlike + ordinary intercolumn space, this extra space is not + suppressed by an @-expression. An <tt>\extracolsep</tt> command can + be used only in an @-expression in the <tt>cols</tt> argument. + <li><tt>*{num}{cols}</tt> - Equivalent to num copies of cols, where num is + any positive integer and cols is any list of + column-specifiers, which may contain another *-expression. + </ul> +<p> + <li><TT>pos</TT> Specifies the vertical position of the whole tabular + environment (recall that it is a <a href="ltx-143.html">box</a>). + The default is to align the box on the center of the environment. + <ul> + <li><tt>t</tt> - align on top row + <li><tt>b</tt> - align on bottom row + </ul> +<p> + <li><TT>width</TT> Specifies the width of the tabular* environment. There + must be rubber space between columns that can stretch to fill out + the specified width. +</ul> + + Note that <a href="ltx-181.html"><tt>\\</tt></a> + must be used to specify the end of each line of the table, except the last. + (It must be used after the last line if an + <a href="ltx-239.html"><tt>\hline</tt></a> command is used to put a line + at the bottom of the table.) + +<h2>Aligning on decimal points: an example of the @ specifier</h2> +In scientific tables it is often desirable to align the columns on a decimal +point. This can be done using the <tt>@</tt> <tt>col</tt> specifier and +breaking the number into the integral part in a right-justified column and +the fractional part in a left-justified column: +<pre> + The following input: will display as: + + <tt>\begin{tabular}{r@{.}l} + 3&14159\\ 3.14159 + 16&2\\ 16.2 + 123$456\\ \end{tabular} 123.456 </tt> +</pre> +Note that the decimal point is replaced by the column separator, <tt>&</tt> +and that the <tt>@</tt>suppresses the intercolumn space + +<h2>Another example: centering and controlling table width</h2> +LaTeX normally sets the width of the tabular environment to "natural" +width, i.e., determined from the contents of the columns. For narrow +tables it is sometimes more pleasing to make them wider. The +<tt>tabular*</tt> environments allows for setting a width; however, it +is necessary to have rubber space between colunmns that can expand to the +specified width. This can often be most easily accomplished by using +an <tt>\extracolsep{wdth}</tt> command in an @ specifier as shown in the +example below which sets the table width to 75% of the text width. +<p> +This example also centers the table. +<pre> + <tt><a href="ltx-29.html">\begin{center}</a> % put inside center environment + \begin{tabular*}{0.75<a href="textwidth.html">\textwidth</a>}% + {@{\extracolsep{<a href="ltx-238.html">\fill</a>}}cccr} + label 1 & label 2 & label 3 & label 4 \\ + <a href="ltx-239.html">\hline</a> % put a line under headers + item 1 & item 2 & item 3 & item 4 \\ + ... + \end{tabular*} + \end{center}</tt> +</pre> +<H2>See also</H2> +<ul> +<li><A href="ltx-214.html">\cline</A> +<li><A href="ltx-239.html">\hline</A> +<li><A href="ltx-268.html">\multicolumn</A> +<li><A href="ltx-346.html">\vline</A> +</ul> +<hr> +See also <a href="ltx-67.html">table environment</a>, + <a href="ltx-202.html">array environment</a>, + <a href="ltx-58.html">tabbing environment</a>.<br> +Return to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 22 Jun 1995. +</address> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-73.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-73.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..f89c5573985 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-73.html @@ -0,0 +1,78 @@ +<html> +<head><title>Help On LaTeX thebibliography</title></head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">thebibliography</font></h1> +<p> +<p><pre> + \begin{thebibliography}{widest-label} + <a href="ltx-205.html">\bibitem</a>[label]{cite_key} + literature citation ... + .... + \end{thebibliography} +</pre> + The <tt>thebibliography</tt> environment produces a bibliography or reference + list. In the article style, this reference list is labeled + "References"; in the report style, it is labeled "Bibliography". +<p> +<TT>widest-label</TT> is text that, when printed, is approximately as wide + as the widest item label produced by the <tt>\bibitem</tt> command. +<p> +The <tt>thebibliography</tt> environment is similar to the +<a href="ltx-222.html"><tt>enumerate</tt></a> environment, except that +items are associated with a <a href="ltx-205.html"><tt>\bibitem</tt></a> +command and can be cross-referenced with the +<A href="ltx-211.html"><tt>\cite</tt></A> command. + +<h2>An example</h2> +In the text you generate a reference to the bibliographic list as follows: +<pre> + <tt> ... In the running text you might want to refer to + Dow & Jones\cite{DandJ} and then again you + might not ... </tt> +</pre> +The <A href="ltx-211.html"><tt>\cite</tt></a> +command will produce a sequence number by default, +or the text from the optional <tt>label</tt> argument of +<A href="ltx-205.html"><tt>\bibcite</tt></a>; this latter is useful +if the style is to use, for example, +the first three letters of the author's last name and a year, as in Dow29. +<p> +The associated item in the bibliography section at the end of the +article would be generated by +<pre> + \begin{thebibliography}{99} + .... + \bibitem{DandJ} Dow, W. \& Jones, E.A., + {<a href="ltx-249.html">\it</a> Wall Street Journal}, + March 29, 1929. + .... + \end{thebibliography} +</pre> +Note that the <tt>widest-label</tt> parameter has been set assuming less than +100 numbered items in the bibliography. Also note that the key, +<tt>DandJ</tt>, is what connects the <A href="ltx-211.html"><tt>\cite</tt></A> +and <A href="ltx-205.html"><tt>\bibitem</tt></A>. +<p> +If <tt>label</tt> is omitted, the numbers are generated sequentially by +the <A href="ltx-205.html"><tt>\bibitem</tt></A> commands. Many journals +want these in order of appearance in the text, so you have to sort this +list to the proper order. + +<H2>See also</H2> +<ul> +<li><A href="ltx-205.html">\bibitem</A> +<li><A href="ltx-211.html">\cite</A> +<li><A href="ltx-279.html">\nocite</A> +<li><a href="ltx-222.html">Enumerate</a> environment +</ul> +Return to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 17 May 1995. +</address> +</body> +</html> + + + + diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-77.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-77.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..c5cf895b2ef --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-77.html @@ -0,0 +1,21 @@ +<html> +<head><title>Help On LaTeX theorem</title> +</head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">theorem</font></h1> +<pre> + \begin{theorem} + theorem text + \end{theorem} +</pre> + The theorem environment produces "Theorem x" in boldface followed by + your theorem text. +<hr> +See also <a href="ltx-3.html">Counters</a><br> +Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 27 Sep 1995. +</address> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-78.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-78.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..ef866ac8c08 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-78.html @@ -0,0 +1,29 @@ +<html> +<head><title>Help On LaTeX titlepage</title></head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">titlepage</font></h1> +<pre> + \begin{titlepage} + text + \end{titlepage} +</pre> + The titlepage environment creates a title page, i.e. a page with no + printed page number or heading. It also causes the following page to + be numbered page one. Text and formatting for the title page + are left to you. +<p> + The <a href="ltx-330.html"><tt>\today</tt></a> command comes in handy for + title pages. Other useful commands include those that change + <a href="ltx-176.html">Typefaces</a>, the + <a href="ltx-29.html">Centering Environment</a>, and the + <a href="ltx-420.html">Abstract Environment</a>. +<hr> +See also <a href="ltx-263.html"><tt>\maketitle</tt></a> and + <a href="ltx-329.html"><tt>\title</tt></a><br> +Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 16 Nov 1995. +</address> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-79.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-79.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..3e32e32e9ec --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-79.html @@ -0,0 +1,43 @@ +<html> +<head><title>Help On LaTeX verbatim</title></head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">verbatim</font></h1> +<p> +<p><pre> + \begin{verbatim} + text + \end{verbatim} +</pre> +or +<pre> + \begin{verbatim*} + text + \end{verbatim*} +</pre> + The <tt>verbatim</tt> environment is a paragraph-making environment + that gets + LaTeX to print exactly what you type in. It turns LaTeX into a + typewriter with carriage returns and blanks having the same effect + that they would on a typewriter. The output looks exactly as it + looks in the input file. +<p> + The difference between <tt>verbatim</tt> and <tt>verbatim*</tt> + is that the latter prints spaces as "visual" spaces, i.e., + a short, squat "u". +<p> + The only text which cannot be placed in the <tt>verbatim</tt> + environment is the 14-character sequence "\end{verbatim}". +<p> + The <tt>verbatim</tt> environment may <strong>not</strong> be used + in the argument of another command. However, it <strong>can</strong> be + placed inside a <a href="ltx-267.html">minipage environment</a> which + allows you to manipulate it's placement. +<hr> +Also see <A href="ltx-342.html">\verb</A><br> +Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 4 Dec 1995. +</address> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-81.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-81.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..a2e8c47f6fa --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-81.html @@ -0,0 +1,20 @@ +<html> +<head><title>Help On LaTeX verse</title> +</head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">verse</font></h1> +<pre> + \begin{verse} + text + \end{verse} +</pre> + The verse environment is designed for poetry, though you may find + other uses for it. +<hr> +Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 27 Sep 1995. +</address> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-82.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-82.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..1fe9fb6bf71 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-82.html @@ -0,0 +1,31 @@ +<html> +<head><title>Help On LaTeX Footnotes</title></head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">Footnotes</font></h1> + + Footnotes can be produced in one of two ways. They can be produced + with one command, the <tt>\footnote</tt> command. They can also be produced + with two commands, the <tt>\footnotemark</tt> and the <tt>\footnotetext</tt> + commands. + See the specific commands, below, for information on why you would use one rather + than another. +<ul> +<li><A href="ltx-231.html">\footnote</A> +<li><A href="ltx-232.html">\footnotemark</A> +<li><A href="ltx-234.html">\footnotetext</A> +<p> +<li><a href="ltx-233.html">\footnotesize</a> refers to a font size +</ul> + Note that footnotes associated with "floated objects" like + <a href="ltx-67.html">tables</a> or <a href="ltx-225.html">figures</a> + may have a problem insofar as the footnote might not follow the floated + object. This can be alleviated by putting the object inside a + <a href="ltx-267.html">minipage environment</a>. +<hr> +See also <a href="ltx-3.html">Counters</a><br> +Return to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 22 Nov 1995. +</address> +</body></html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-86.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-86.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..e04c6937cb2 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-86.html @@ -0,0 +1,111 @@ +<html> +<head><title>Help On LaTeX Lengths</title></head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">Lengths</font></h1> +<p> + A length is a measure of distance. Many LaTeX commands take a length + as an argument. + A length of one inch is specified by typing <tt>1in</tt> or, to specify + the same length using metric units, by typing <tt>2.54cm</tt>. + +<h2>Units</h2> + LaTeX knows about the following common units. +<ul> +<li><tt>in</tt> - inches +<li><tt>mm</tt> - millimeters +<li><tt>cm</tt> - centimeters +<li><tt>pt</tt> - points (about 1/72 inch) +<li><tt>em</tt> - approximately the width of an "M" + <em>in the current font</em> +<li><tt>ex</tt> - approximately the height of an "x" + <em>in the current font</em> +</ul> + And the following less common units +<ul> +<li><tt>pc</tt> - pica (12pt/pc) +<li><tt>bp</tt> - big pt (72bp/in) +<li><tt>dd</tt> - didôt (1157dd=1238pt) +<li><tt>cc</tt> - cîcero (12dd/cc) +<li><tt>sp</tt> - scaled point (65536sp/pt) +</ul> + Lengths may also be negative, for example, <tt>-1.5em</tt>.<br> + Note that the number <tt>0</tt> by itself is not a length; + it must be specified as <tt>0in</tt> or <tt>0pt</tt>, for example.<br> + +<h2><a name="lencmd">Length commands</a></h2> + A length may also be specified by a <em>length command</em>. An example + is <tt>\parindent</tt> + whose value specifies the current width of the indentation + which begins paragraphs. Multiples of such length commands may be specified, + for example by writing <tt>2.5\parindent</tt> or <tt>-0.1\parindent</tt>. +<p> + Some length commands are +<ul> +<li><tt>\parindent</tt> - normal paragraph indentation +<li><a href="baselineskip.html"><tt>\baselineskip</tt></a> - + normal vertical distance between lines in a paragraph +<ul><li><a href="baselineskip.html"><tt>\baselinestretch</tt></a> - multiplies + <tt>\baselineskip</tt></ul> +<li><a href="parskip.html"><tt>\parskip</tt></a> - + the <strong>extra</strong> vertical space between + paragraphs +<li><a href="textwidth.html"><tt>\textwidth</tt></a> - + the width of text on the page +<li><a href="textwidth.html"><tt>\linewidth</tt></a> - + width of a line in the <strong>local</strong> + environment +<li><tt>\textheight</tt> - the height of text on the page +<li><a href="unitlength.html"><tt>\unitlength</tt></a> - units of + lenght in <a href="ltx-43.html">Picture</a> Environment +</ul> +All length commands are robust and <strong>should not</strong> be preceded +by a <tt>\protect</tt> command. + +<h2><a name="rubber">Rubber lengths</a></h2> +Most lengths have a fixed value. However, LaTeX also allows for "rubber" +lengths; these have a natural length plus a degree of elasticity. For +example, the <tt>\fill</tt> length command has a natural length of zero +but is infinitely stretchable, so that a space of width <tt>\fill</tt> will +try to stretch as much as possible. Multiplying a rubber length by a fixed +factor destroys its elasticity: <tt>0.5\fill</tt> becomes a rigid length +with a value of zero. + +<h2>Setting values for length commands</h2> +The following LaTeX commands define and manipulate the value of length +commands +<ul> +<li><A href="ltx-87.html"><tt>\newlength</tt></A> - define a new length command +<p> +<li><A href="ltx-88.html"><tt>\setlength</tt></A> +<li><A href="ltx-89.html"><tt>\addtolength</tt></A> +<p> +<li><A href="ltx-90.html"><tt>\settowidth</tt></A> +<li><A href="ltx-311.html"><tt>\settoheight</tt></A> +<li><A href="ltx-312.html"><tt>\settodepth</tt></A> +</ul> + +<h2>Commands that add space</h2> +<ul> +<li>Horizontal space + <ul> + <li><a href="ltx-238.html"><tt>\hfill</tt></a> + <li><a href="ltx-241.html"><tt>\hspace</tt></a> + </ul> +<li>Vertical Space + <ul> + <li><a href="ltx-198.html"><tt>\addvspace</tt></a> + <li><a href="ltx-318.html"><tt>\smallskip</tt></a> + <li><a href="ltx-266.html"><tt>\medskip</tt></a> + <li><a href="ltx-206.html"><tt>\bigskip</tt></a> + <li><a href="ltx-345.html"><tt>\vfill</tt></a> + <li><a href="ltx-347.html"><tt>\vspace</tt></a> + </ul> +</ul> +<hr> +Back to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 23 Oct 1995. +</address> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-87.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-87.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..d0cfcc367d2 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-87.html @@ -0,0 +1,21 @@ +<html> +<head><title>Help On LaTeX \newlength</title></head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\newlength</font></h1> +<p> + <tt>\newlength{\gnat}</tt> +<p> + + The <tt>\newlength</tt> command defines the mandatory argument, <tt>\gnat</tt>, + as a + length command with a value of 0in. An error occurs if a <tt>\gnat</tt> + command already exists. +<hr> +See <a href="ltx-86.html">Lengths</a><br> +Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 8 May 1995. +</address> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-88.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-88.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..54623e8ddb3 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-88.html @@ -0,0 +1,22 @@ +<html> +<head><title>Help On LaTeX \setlength</title></head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\setlength</font></h1> +<p> + <tt>\setlength{len-cmd}{len}</tt> +<p> + + The <tt>\setlength</tt> command is used to set the value of a length command, + <tt>len-cmd</tt>, which is specified as the first argument. + The <tt>len</tt> argument can be expressed in any terms of length LaTeX + understands, i.e., inches (in), millimeters (mm), points (pt), etc. + +<hr> +See <a href="ltx-86.html">Lengths</a><br> +Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 9 May 1995. +</address> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-89.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-89.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..f6b77694576 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-89.html @@ -0,0 +1,27 @@ +<html> +<head><title>Help On LaTeX \addtolength</title></head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\addtolength</font></h1> +<p> + <tt>\addtolength{len-cmd}{len}</tt> +<p> + + The <tt>\addtolength</tt> command increments a + <a href="ltx-86.html#lencmd">length command</a>, + <tt>len-cmd</tt>, which is specified by the first argument, by the amount + specified in the <tt>len</tt> argument. It can be a negative amount. +<p> +As an example, +<pre> + <tt>\addtolength{<a href="parskip.html">\parskip</a>}{-.1\parskip}</tt> +</pre> +decreases the value of <tt>\parskip</tt> by 10%. +<hr> +See <a href="ltx-86.html">Lengths</a><br> +Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 9 May 1995. +</address> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-90.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-90.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..ee987ef0a6a --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-90.html @@ -0,0 +1,21 @@ +<html> +<head><title>Help On LaTeX \settowidth</title></head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\settowidth</font></h1> +<p> + <tt>\settowidth{len-cmd}{text}</tt> +<p> + + The <tt>\settowidth</tt> command sets the value of a + <a href="ltx-86.html#lencmd">length command</a>, <tt>len-cmd</tt>, + which is specified as the first argument, equal to + the width of the <tt>text</tt> argument in the current font. +<hr> +See <a href="ltx-86.html">Lengths</a><br> +Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 9 May 1995. +</address> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-91.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-91.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..1aaa58df93a --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-91.html @@ -0,0 +1,78 @@ +<html> +<head><title>Help On LaTeX Letters</title> +</head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">Letters</font></h1> + You can use LaTeX to typeset letters, both personal and business. The + letter document style is designed to make a number of letters at once, + although you can make just one if you so desire. +<p> + Your *.tex source file has the same + <a href="input.html#structure">minimum commands</a> as the other + document styles, i.e., you must have the following commands as a + minimum: +<pre> + <tt>\documentstyle{letter} + <a href="ltx-315.html">\signature{Your Name}</a> + <a href="ltx-93.html">\address{Return address}</a> + \begin{document} + ... First letter ... + ... Second letter ... + ... + \end{document}</tt> +</pre> +Note that the <tt>\address</tt> and <tt>\signature</tt> commands are +<a href="declarations.html">declarations</a> and follow the usual +scope rules. They are generally placed in the preamble, as indicated here, +and apply to all letters in the file. +<p> + Each letter is a letter <a href="ltx-27.html">environment</a>, + whose argument is the name and + address of the recipient. For example, a typical letter might have<pre> + <tt>\begin{letter}{Mr. John Doe \\ 2345 Jones St. + \\ Oakland, CA 91123} + <a href="ltx-97.html">\opening{Dear John,}</a> + ... + text of letter + ... + <a href="ltx-98.html">\closing{Best regards,}</a> + \end{letter}</tt> +</pre> + The letter itself begins with the + <a href="ltx-97.html"><tt>\opening</tt></a> command. The text of the + letter follows. It is typed as ordinary LaTeX input. Commands that + make no sense in a letter, like <tt>\chapter,</tt> don't work. The letter + closes with a + <a href="ltx-98.html"><tt>\closing</tt></a> command. +<h2>Closing matter</h2> + Several commands may be used after the <tt>\closing</tt> command: +<ul> +<li><tt>\ps{PS text}</tt> command produces a "P.S." +<li><tt>\cc{text}</tt> command produces the usual "cc: text". +<li><tt>\encl{list of enclosures}</tt> command produces an "encl:" list +</ul> +<h2>Date</h2> +The <a href="ltx-330.html"><tt>\today</tt></a> command is used by the +letter <a href="ltx-22.html">document style</a> to generate the date. +If you wish a fixed date, rather than the current date, you should use<pre> + <tt><a href="ltx-18.html">\renewcommand</a>{\today}{Month day, year}</tt> +</pre> +This may be put in the preamble if it is to apply to all letters in the +file, or just before the <tt>\opening</tt> command if it is to apply to +just that letter. +<hr> +See also +<ul> +<li><a href="ltx-93.html"><tt>\address</tt></a> +<li><A href="ltx-98.html"><tt>\closing</tt></A> +<li><a href="ltx-261.html"><tt>\location</tt></a> +<li><A href="ltx-97.html"><tt>\opening</tt></A> +<li><a href="ltx-315.html"><tt>\signature</tt></a> +<li><a href="ltx-323.html"><tt>\telephone</tt></a> +</ul> +Return to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 24 Jun 1995. +</address> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-93.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-93.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..28fcacada52 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-93.html @@ -0,0 +1,22 @@ +<html> +<head><title>Help On LaTeX \address</title></head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\address</font></h1> +<tt>\address{Return address}</tt> +<p> + The return address, as it should appear on the letter and the + envelope. Separate lines of the address should be separated by +<a href="ltx-181.html"><tt>\\</tt></a> + commands. If you do not make an <tt>\address</tt> declaration, then the + letter will be formatted for copying onto your organization's + standard letterhead. If you give an <tt>\address</tt> declaration, then the + letter will be formatted as a personal letter. +<hr> +See <a href="ltx-91.html">Letters</a><br> +Return to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 28 Apr 1995. +</address> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-97.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-97.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..226af36881b --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-97.html @@ -0,0 +1,20 @@ +<html> +<head><title>Help On LaTeX \opening</title></head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\opening</font></h1> + <tt>\opening{text}</tt> +<p> + The letter begins with the <tt>\opening</tt> command. The mandatory argument, + <tt>text</tt>, is what ever text you wish to start your letter, for example: +<pre> + <tt>\opening{Dear John,}</tt> +</pre> +</body> +<hr> +See <a href="ltx-91.html">Letters</a><br> +Return to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 24 Jun 1995. +</address> +</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-98.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-98.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..e505cb235b9 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-98.html @@ -0,0 +1,23 @@ +<html> +<head><title>Help On LaTeX \closing</title> +</head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\closing</font></h1> + <tt>\closing{text}</tt> +<p> + The letter closes with a <tt>\closing</tt> command, where the +mandatory argument, <tt>text</tt> is the desired text, for example: +<pre> + <tt>\closing{Sincerely yours,}</tt> +</pre> +The signature will be taken from the +<a href="ltx-315.html"><tt>\signature</tt></a> declaration. +<hr> +See <a href="ltx-91.html">Letters</a><br> +Return to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 24 Jun 1995. +</address> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-99.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-99.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..c83b00674c1 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-99.html @@ -0,0 +1,40 @@ +<html> +<head><title>Help On LaTeX Line and Page Breaking</title> +</head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">Line and Page Breaking</font></h1> + The first thing LaTeX does when processing ordinary text is to + translate your input file into a string of glyphs and spaces. To + produce a printed document, this string must be broken into lines, and + these lines must be broken into pages. In some environments, you do + the line breaking yourself with the <tt>\\</tt> command, but LaTeX usually does + it for you. + +<H2>Commands for line and page breaks</H2> +<ul> +<li><A href="ltx-181.html">\\</A> +<li><A href="ltx-182.html">\-</A> +<li><A href="ltx-244.html">\hyphenation</A> +<p> +<li><A href="ltx-212.html">\cleardoublepage</A> +<li><A href="ltx-213.html">\clearpage</A> +<p> +<li><A href="ltx-275.html">\newline</A> +<li><A href="ltx-258.html">\linebreak</A> +<li><A href="ltx-281.html">\nolinebreak</A> +<li><A href="ltx-276.html">\newpage</A> +<li><A href="ltx-289.html">\pagebreak</A> +<li><A href="ltx-283.html">\nopagebreak</A> +</ul> + +</body> +<hr> +For page numbering, see <a href="ltx-3.html">Counters</a><br> +To refer to a page number in the text, see + <a href="ltx-291.html"><tt>\pageref</tt></a><br> +Return to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 20 Oct 1995. +</address> +</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-tar.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-tar.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..ddb8132efbe --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-tar.html @@ -0,0 +1,102 @@ +<html> +<head> +<title>Hypertext LaTeX Help files</title> +</head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" +text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> + +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">Hypertext LaTeX Help files</font></h1> + +<p>If you find Hypertext Help with LaTeX to be useful, you are welcome to +obtain the complete set of files and install them on your own machine. +Retrieval and installation instructions are given below. +They may be installed for use either with a webserver, which +will ease network traffic and probably give you faster access, +or they may be installed as local files which may be "read" +with an HTML viewer, such as Mosaic, Cello, Lynx, Netscape, etc. +without the necessity of a network connection.</p> + +<p>To facilitate off-network usage, +the files generally have only local (within the same directory) hypertext +links. All links to "external" URLs, including much LaTeX information +available on the Web, have been restricted to one file in this set other than +the current one.</p> + +<p>Although it is not required, if you make these files available on a public +Web server, please send a note to +<a href="mailto:webmaster@giss.nasa.gov">webmaster@giss.nasa.gov</a> +so that we can add you to the list of +<a href="mirror.html">mirror sites</a>.</p> + + +<hr> + +<p>The files are available via anonymous ftp as a +<a href="ftp://ftp.giss.nasa.gov/pub/sgreen/latex/latex.tar.Z">Unix-compressed +tar file</a> (about 125 KByte) or +<a href="ftp://ftp.giss.nasa.gov/pub/sgreen/latex/latex.tar.gz">gzipped +tar file</a> (about 85 KByte). +Your Web browser can probably retrieve the files via the above link, or they +can be retrieved by anonymous ftp to ftp.giss.nasa.gov. +Login as anonymous and give your e-mail address as the password, +then switch to binary mode and download the file by issuing the +commands:</p> + +<pre> + bin + cd pub/sgreen/latex + get filename.tar.Z +</pre> + +<p>or</p> + +<pre> + bin + cd pub/sgreen/latex + get filename.tar.gz +</pre> + +<p>After downloading the file on your local machine, issue the +Unix commands:</p> + +<pre> + uncompress filename.tar.Z + tar -xf filename.tar +</pre> + +or + +<pre> + gunzip filename.tar.gz + tar -xf filename.tar +</pre> + + +<p>(Note: some Web software, such as Mosaic, will automatically +uncompress the file after retrieving it, in which case save it as +<code>filename.tar</code> and execute only the <code>tar -xf</code> +line above.) This will create a subdirectory named +<code>latex</code> in your current directory which contains the complete +set of html files and which requires about 1 MByte of disk space. +The "Introduction" file is <code>index.html</code> and the Table of +Contents page is <code>ltx-2.html</code>. </p> + +<p>You may rename or move the entire <code>latex</code> subdirectory +if desired; all file references are local to this directory so links +should continue to work.</p> + +<hr> + +<ul> + <li><a href="index.html">Back to the Introduction</a> + <li><a href="ltx-2.html">On to the Table of Contents</a> +</ul> + +<hr> + +<address> +Page revised: 1998-05-21, RBS +</address> + +</body> +</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/mathfonts.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/mathfonts.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..e5b78af08ee --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/mathfonts.html @@ -0,0 +1,87 @@ +<html> +<head><title>Help On LaTeX math fonts and styles</title></head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">Math fonts and styles</font></h1> + +<h2>Math styles</h2> +The following applies to both LaTeX 2.09 and LaTeX2e. +<p> +There are four styles used in typesetting <a href="ltx-115.html">math +formulas</a> which affect the size and certain formatting parameters +(notably the placement of sub and superscripts on <a href="ltx-408.html"> +variable size symbols</a>). +<ul> +<li><tt>\textstyle</tt> - default in the running text and in + <a href="ltx-202.html">array</a> environment +<li><tt>\displaystyle</tt> - default for displayed equations +<li><tt>\scriptstyle</tt> - default for first-level sub and superscripts +<li><tt>\scriptscriptstyle</tt> - default for higher-level sub and superscripts +</ul> +All four of these may be used in math mode as +<a href="declarations.html">declarations</a> to <strong>force</strong> the +type size and formatting to a style other than what would normally be used. +<p> +For example, to get a superscript that is the same size as the running text: +<pre> <tt>$e^{\textstyle -E/kT}</tt>$ </pre> +<p> +As another example, the limits on a summation symbol are normally placed +below and above the symbol in <tt>display</tt> style and in normal sub and +superscript position in <tt>textstyle</tt>. One could <strong>force</strong> +the below/above placement in running text by using: +<pre> <tt>\displaystyle $<a href="ltx-408.html">\sum</a>_{n=0}^<a href="ltx-407.html">\infty</a> x_n$</tt></pre> +although it should be noted that this might cause LaTeX to leave extra +space between the text lines which might not be desirable. + +<h2>LaTeX 2.09 fonts</h2> +The regular <a href="ltx-177.html">type style</a> declarations can be +used in <a href="ltx-115.html#math">math mode</a>. +They affect only letters (including upper case <a href="ltx-405.html">Greek</a> +letters) but not symbols +(or lower case <a href="ltx-405.html">Greek</a> letters). Two additional style +<a href="declarations.html">declarations</a> which can be used +<strong>only</strong> in math mode are +<ul> +<li><tt>\mit</tt> +<li><tt><a href="ltx-407.html">\cal</a></tt> +</ul> +The former is math italic style; it spaces letters as if they were words, +however, not as if they were each separate math symbols. +The latter produces upper case calligraphic letters. + +<h2>LaTeX2e math fonts</h2> +The following <a href="declarations.html">declarations</a> change the style +only of letters, numbers, and uppercase <a href="ltx-405.html">Greek</a>. +<ul> +<li><tt>\mathit</tt> - same as <tt>\mit</tt> in 2.09 (see above) +<li><tt>\mathrm</tt> - Roman +<li><tt>\mathbf</tt> - Bold face +<li><tt>\mathsf</tt> - San Serif +<li><tt>\mathtt</tt> - Typewriter style +<li><tt><a href="ltx-407.html">\mathcal</a></tt> - Calligraphic +</ul> +All of these produce spacing appropriate for text; they do not interpret each +letter as a separate math symbol. +<p> +The <a href="boldmath.html"><tt>\boldmath</tt></a> declaration causes +everything (including symbols) in a formula to be in a bold font. +Note that this differs somewhat from the same declaration in 2.09 which +did not affect some symbols. +<hr> +Related topics +<ul> +<li><a href="ltx-115.html">Math Formulas</a> +<li><a href="ltx-176.html">Typefaces</a> + <ul><li><a href="ltx-177.html">Styles</a> + <li><a href="ltx-178.html">Sizes</a> + <li><a href="fonts2e.html">LaTeX2e fonts</a> + </ul> +<li><a href="ltx-408.html">Variable size symbols</a> +<li><a href="ltx-407.html">Miscellaneous symbols</a> +</ul> +Return to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 2 Jun 1995. +</address> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/mirror.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/mirror.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..fd87330c1bf --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/mirror.html @@ -0,0 +1,125 @@ +<html> +<head><title>Hypertext Help with LaTeX - Mirror Sites</title> +</head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> + +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br> +<font color="#cc0000">Mirror Sites</font></h1> + +<p>Copies of <strong>Hypertext Help with LaTeX</strong> are available +from several other Web sites which might provide faster access depending +on your location. +However, these files may not be quite as up-to-date as the original files at +<a href="http://www.giss.nasa.gov/latex/">NASA Goddard Institute for +Space Studies, New York, NY, USA</a>.</p> + +<p>The following mirror sites were last verified on December 3, 1998. +Please contact +<a href="mailto:webmaster@giss.nasa.gov">webmaster@giss.nasa.gov</a> +if you discover that one of these sites is no longer available or +if you know of additional sites that should be listed.</p> + + +<dl> + +<dt><b>Australia</b> +<dd><a href="http://ecco.bsee.swin.edu.au/text/hyperlatex/">Swinburne + University of Technology</a> + <!-- verified 19981203 --> + +<dt><b>Brazil</b> +<dd><a href="http://www.cos.ufrj.br/~gabriel/latex/">Universidade Federal + do Rio de Janeiro</a> + <!-- verified 19981203 --> + +<dt><b>Canada</b> +<dd><a href="http://www.cs.ualberta.ca/~vladimir/latex/">Dept. Of Computing + Science, University of Alberta</a> + <!-- verified 19981203 --> + +<dd><a href="http://sault.qucis.queensu.ca/wright/latex/">Dept. Of Computing + and Information Science, Queen's University</a> + <!-- verified 19981203 --> + +<dt><b>Chile</b> +<dd><a href="http://www.dim.uchile.cl/documents/giss-latex/">Departamento + de Ingeniería Matemática, Universidad de Chile</a> + <!-- verified 19981203 --> + +<dt><b>Denmark</b> +<dd><a href="http://www.astro.ku.dk/help/LaTeX/">Niels Bohr Institute for + Astronomy, Physics and Geophysics, University of Copenhagen</a> + <small>(May 1995 copy)</small> + <!-- verified 19981203 --> + +<dt><b>Germany</b> +<dd><a href="http://www-ti.informatik.uni-tuebingen.de/~frech/latex/">Arbeitsbereich + Technische Informatik, University of Tübingen</a> + <!-- verified 19981203 --> + +<dt><b>India</b> +<dd><a href="http://www.aero.iitm.ernet.in/dcf/LaTeX/">Indian Institute + of Technology, Madras</a> + <!-- verified 19981203 --> + +<dt><b>Ireland</b> +<dd><a href="http://www.eeng.dcu.ie/local-docs/latex-help/">School of + Electonic Engineering, Dublin City University</a> + <!-- verified 19981203 --> + +<!-- not responding 19981203 +<dt><b>Mexico</b> +<dd><a href="http://ixmati.uam.mx/comp/LaTeX/LaTeXHelp">UAM-Iztapalapa</a> +--> + +<!-- not responding 19981203 +<dt><b>Netherlands</b> +<dd><a href="http://www.fys.ruu.nl/~fange/LaTeX/">Universiteit Utrecht</a> +--> + +<dt><b>Norway</b> +<dd><a href="http://mitra.phys.uit.no/edb/latex/">University of + Tromsø</a> + <small>(May 1995 copy)</small> + <!-- verified 19981203 --> + +<dt><b>Poland</b> +<dd><a href="http://zon8.physd.amu.edu.pl/LaTeX/">Institute of Physics, + Adam Mickiewicz University</a> + <small>(November 1995 copy)</small> + <!-- verified 19981203 --> + +<dt><b>Portugal</b> +<dd><a href="http://www.astro.up.pt/LaTeX/">Center for Astrophysics, + University of Porto</a> + <!-- verified 19981203 --> + +<dt><b>Russia</b> +<dd><a href="http://www.izmiran.rssi.ru/doc/latex/">Institute of + Terrestrial Magnetism, Ionosphere and Radiowave Propagation</a> + <!-- verified 19981203 --> + +<dt><b>Sweden</b> +<dd><a href="http://www.ce.chalmers.se/~case/Help/LaTeX/">Dept. + of Computer Engineering, Chalmers University of Technology</a> + <!-- verified 19981203 --> + +<dt><b>Switzerland</b> +<dd><a href="http://www.ee.ethz.ch/isg/tardis/soft/latex/green/">Dept. + of Electrical Engineering, Federal Institute of Technology</a> + <!-- verified 19981203 --> + +<dt><b>United States</b> +<dd><a href="http://www.giss.nasa.gov/latex/">NASA Goddard Institute + for Space Studies</a> + +</dl> + +<hr> + +<address> +Page revised: 1998-12-03, RBS +</address> + +</body> +</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/parskip.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/parskip.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..0f22ae706d1 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/parskip.html @@ -0,0 +1,27 @@ +<html> +<head><title>Help On LaTeX \parskip</title> +</head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" +text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> + +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\parskip</font></h1> +<tt>\parskip</tt> is the extra vertical space inserted before a +paragraph. It has a natural length of zero but should be a +<a href="ltx-86.html#rubber">rubber length</a> so that it may +be stretched in a +<a href="ltx-227.html">flushbottom</a> environment. +<p> +To increase <tt>\parskip</tt> to skip a line between paragraphs one +could use +<pre> + <tt><a href="ltx-89.html">\addtolength</a>{<a href="parskip.html">\parskip</a>}{<a href="baselineskip.html">\baselineskip}</a></tt> +</pre> +<hr> +See also: <A href="ltx-86.html">Lengths</A><br> +Return to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 23 Oct 1995. +</address> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/refs.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/refs.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..b8d15e4f741 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/refs.html @@ -0,0 +1,53 @@ +<html> +<head><title>LaTeX Reference Books</title></head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">LaTeX Reference Books</font></h1> + + +<p The standard reference source for LaTeX is +<cite>A Document Preparation System: LaTeX</cite>, +by Leslie Lamport, ISBN 0-201-52983-1, published +jointly by the American Mathematical Society and Addison-Wesley +Publishing Company. The 2nd edition, 1994, describes LaTeX2e, the +second widely distributed version of LaTeX. The first edition of this +book, which appeared in 1985, described LaTeX 2.09.</p> + +<p>The standard reference for what goes on inside TeX is +<cite>The TeXbook</cite> +by Donald E. Knuth, ISBN 0-201-13448-9, published jointly by +the American Mathematical Society and Addison-Wesley.</p> + +<p>M. Goossens, F. Mittelbach, and A. Samarin, +<cite>The LaTeX Companion</cite>, published +by Addison-Wesley, ISBN 0-201-54199-8 (essential for the serious +LaTeX hackers).</p> + +<p>L. Botway and C. Biemesderfer, +<cite>LaTeX Command Summary</cite>, published by +the TeX Users Group, Providence, RI is a good companion.</p> + +<p>A. Diller, +<cite>LaTeX Line by Line</cite>, published by Wiley.</p> + +<p>N. Walsh, +<cite><a href="http://www.ora.com/catalog/tex/">Making TeX Work</a></cite>, +published by O'Reilly & Associates, ISBN 1-56592-051-1.</p> + +<hr> + +<p>Other information is available <a href="externals.html">on the Web</a>.</p> + +<hr> + +<p>Back to the <a href="index.html">Introduction</a><br> +Go to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a></p> + +<hr> + +<address> +Revised: RBS, 20 February 1997<br> +Thanks to Anthony Stone (Cambridge) for suggestions. +</address> + +</body> +</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/stackrel.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/stackrel.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..1ae9cb1bc03 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/stackrel.html @@ -0,0 +1,90 @@ +<html> +<head><title>Help On LaTeX \stackrel and \mathop</title></head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\stackrel</font></h1> +<p> +This can be used to stack something above something else; used in math mode. +<pre> + <tt>\stackrel{top}{bot}</tt> +</pre> +The first argument, <tt>top</tt>, is typset immediately above the +second argument, <tt>bot</tt>; the former is set in the same +math style as a superscript. +<p> +For example +<pre> + <tt>H$_2$CO$_3$ $\stackrel{<a href="ltx-304.html">\rm</a> heat} + {<a href="ltx-406.html">\longrightarrow}</a>$ H$_2$O + CO$_2$</tt> +</pre> +will produce something like +<pre><tt> + heat + H CO ------> H O + CO + 2 3 2 2 +</tt></pre> +Note that the the <a href="ltx-304.html"><tt>\rm</tt></a> declaration is used +so that "heat" is set in Roman face and not math italics. +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br>a name="mathop">\mathop</a></h1> +This command does not seem to be well documented but appears to work, +at least in current versions of LaTeX 2.09. +<p> +The argument is considered to be a single <a href="ltx-408.html">variable +sized math symbol</a> for purposes of placing limits below +(<a href="ltx-179.html">subscripts</a>) and above +(<a href="ltx-180.html">superscripts</a>) in +<a href="mathfonts.html">display math</a> style. For example, +<pre> + <tt>\mathop{\sum \sum}_{i,j=1}^{N} a_i a_j</tt> +</pre> +would produce something like +<pre> + N + --- --- + \ \ + / / a a + --- --- i j + i,j +</pre> +It is possible to create <strong>two rows</strong> of "subscripts" by using +a similar construction: The first row is created as subscripts of the symbol +in the usual way and a lower row is created by placing this whole construct +as the argument of a <tt>\mathop</tt> command with its own subscript. For +example +<pre> + <tt>\mathop{\sum_{i,j=1}^{N}}_{i>j}</tt> +</pre> +would produce something like +<pre> + N + --- + \ + / + --- + i,j=1 + i>j +</pre> + +<hr> +Related topics +<ul> +<li><a href="ltx-115.html">Math Formulas</a> + and <a href="ltx-117.html">Math Symbols</a> +<li><a href="ltx-406.html">Arrows</a> +<li><a href="ltx-404.html">Binary and relational opertors</a> +<li><a href="ltx-223.html">Eqnarray Environment</a> +<li><a href="ltx-224.html">Equation Environment</a> +<li><a href="ltx-421.html">Displaymath Environment</a> +<li><a href="mathfonts.html">Math Fonts and Styles</a> +<p> +<li><a href="ltx-287.html"><tt>\overbrace</tt></a> +<li><a href="ltx-288.html"><tt>\overline</tt></a> +<li><a href="ltx-335.html"><tt>\underbrace</tt></a> +<li><a href="ltx-336.html"><tt>\underline</tt></a> +</ul> +Return to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 15 Aug 1995. +</address> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/textwidth.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/textwidth.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..912c11d74be --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/textwidth.html @@ -0,0 +1,21 @@ +<html> +<head><title>Help On LaTeX \textwidth \linewidth</title> +</head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\textwidth \linewidth</font></h1> +<tt>\textwidth</tt> is the normal width of the text on a page. It should +generally be changed only in the <a href="input.html#structure">preamble</a>. +<p> +<tt>\linewidth</tt> is the width of lines in the current environment. Normally +equal to <tt>\textwidth</tt>, it may be different within an environment such +as <a href="lists.html">list</a> or +<a href="ltx-298.html">quote</a> environments. +<hr> +See also: <A href="ltx-86.html">Lengths</A><br> +Return to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 23 Jun 1995. +</address> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/toc.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/toc.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..5f975e1a36f --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/toc.html @@ -0,0 +1,26 @@ +<html> +<head><title>Help On LaTeX \tableofcontents</title></head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\tableofcontents</font></h1> +<p> + A table of contents is produced with the + <tt>\tableofcontents</tt> command. You + put the command right where you want the table of contents to go; + LaTeX does the rest for you. + Entries are taken from the <a href="ltx-141.html">Sectioning</a> commands. +<p> + <tt>\tableofcontents</tt> produces a heading, but it does not + automatically start a new page. If you want a new page after the + table of contents, include a + <a href="ltx-276.html"><tt>\newpage</tt></a> command after the + <tt>\tableofcontents</tt> command. +<p> +<hr> +See also <a href="ltx-170.html">Table of Contents</a><br> +Return to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 5 Jun 1995. +</address> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/trivlist.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/trivlist.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..e73e8d4ba85 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/trivlist.html @@ -0,0 +1,30 @@ +<html> +<head><title>Help On LaTeX trivlist</title></head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">trivlist</font></h1> +<p> +<p><pre> + <tt>\begin{trivlist} + \item First item + .... + \end{trivlist}</tt> +</pre> +This is ike the <a href="ltx-260.html">List Environment</a>, but +uses the currently defined values of +list-making parameters. It is normally used to define an environment with a +single item, with an <a href="item.html"><tt>\item</tt></a> command +as part of the environment definition. +<hr> +See <a href="lists.html">Lists</a>, + <a href="ltx-260.html">List Environment</a>, + <a href="ltx-27.html">Environments</a><br> +Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 1 Jun 1995. +</address> +</body> +</html> + + + diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/unitlength.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/unitlength.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..f1bd14691d4 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/unitlength.html @@ -0,0 +1,24 @@ +<html> +<head><title>Help On LaTeX \unitlength</title></head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\unitlength</font></h1> + <tt>\unitlength</tt> +<p> + The <tt>\unitlength</tt> command is a <a href="ltx-86.html">Length + command</a>. It defines the units used in the + <a href="ltx-43.html">Picture Environment</a> +<p> +The default value is 1 point (approximately 1/72 inch) but it may +be changed using the <a href="ltx-88.html"><tt>\setlength</tt></a> +command. +<hr> +See also <A href="ltx-27.html">Environments</A>, + <A href="ltx-43.html">Picture Environment</A><br> +See also <a href="ltx-86.html">Lengths</a><br> +Return to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> +<hr> +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 12 May 1995. +</address> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/versions.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/versions.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..922e5070f98 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/versions.html @@ -0,0 +1,83 @@ +<html> +<head> +<title>LaTeX 2.09 and LaTeX2e</title> +</head> +<body bgcolor="#ffffff" +text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> + +<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br> +<font color="#cc0000">LaTeX 2.09 and LaTeX2e</font></h1> + +<p>The following information is excerpted from "A Document Preparation System: +LaTeX" by Leslie Lamport, 2nd edition and/or "LaTeX2e for authors", +by the LaTeX3 Project Team, June 1994.</p> + +<p>LaTex2e was produced in an attempt to reconcile the various, sometimes +incompatble, "flavors" of LaTeX which were developing. Some of these +included the New Font Selection Scheme (NFSS), SLITeX (for slides), +AASTeX (the American Astronomical Society macros), etc. The major +change to LaTeX2e is the method for trying to make the use of add-on +packages more uniform by the introduction of "classes" +and "packages." Most of the new commands are the "initial" commands, +i.e., those which can appear only <em>before</em> the +<tt>\documentclass</tt> command.</p> + +<p>A few standard LaTeX commands have been modified and a few new commands +added, notably:</p> + +<ul> + <li><a href="ltx-18.html"><tt>\newcommand</tt></a> (and related) commands, + which now allow for an optional argument in newly defined commands + <li><a href="ensuremath.html"><tt>\ensuremath</tt></a> +</ul> + + +<h2>Document Styles and Style Options</h2> + +<p>In LaTeX2e, documents begin with a <tt>\documentclass</tt> command. This +replaces the LaTeX 2.09 +<a href="ltx-22.html"><tt>\documentstyle</tt></a> command. The +<tt>\usepackage</tt> command has been added and is used in conjunction +with <tt>\documentclass</tt>.</p> + +<p> aTeX2e still understands the old +<a href="ltx-22.html"><tt>\documentstyle</tt></a> command; if it is +encountered, LaTex2e enters <em>compatibility +mode</em> in which most 2.09 input files should still be processed properly.</p> + + +<h2>Type Styles and Sizes</h2> + +<p>LaTeX 2.09 commands for changing type style, for example, <tt>\tt</tt>, +still work similarly in LaTeX2e. +The major difference is that <tt>\sc</tt> and <tt>\sl</tt> +can no longer be used in math mode (except when LaTeX2e is in +<em>compatibility mode</em>, see above).</p> + +<p>However, <a href="fonts2e.html">a new set of commands</a> +have been added to allow separate (and independent) specification of </p> + +<ul> + <li>Shape + <li>Series + <li>Family +</ul> + +<p>These can be combined to form a wide variety of type styles. If a style +you specify is not available on your computer, LaTeX2e produce a warning +message and will substitute a style it thinks is similar.</p> + +<hr> + +<p>Return to the <a href="index.html">Introduction</a><br> +Go to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a></p> + +<hr> + +<address> +Revised: Sheldon Green, 14 May 1995. +</address> + + +</body> +</html> |